Linux 2.6.18-rc2

Finishing up for the kernel summit. Ottawa, here I come.

Signed-off-by: Linus Torvalds <torvalds@osdl.org>

CREDITS

@@ -24,6 +24,11 @@ S: C. Negri 6, bl. D3
 S: Iasi 6600
 S: Romania
 
+N: Mark Adler
+E: madler@alumni.caltech.edu
+W: http://alumnus.caltech.edu/~madler/
+D: zlib decompression
+
 N: Monalisa Agrawal
 E: magrawal@nortelnetworks.com
 D: Basic Interphase 5575 driver with UBR and ABR support.
@@ -523,11 +528,11 @@ S: Oxford
 S: United Kingdom
 
 N: Luiz Fernando N. Capitulino
-E: lcapitulino@terra.com.br
-E: lcapitulino@prefeitura.sp.gov.br
-W: http://www.telecentros.sp.gov.br
-D: Little fixes and a lot of janitorial work
-S: E-GOV Telecentros SP
+E: lcapitulino@mandriva.com.br
+E: lcapitulino@gmail.com
+W: http://www.cpu.eti.br
+D: misc kernel hacking
+S: Mandriva
 S: Brazil
 
 N: Remy Card
@@ -1573,12 +1578,8 @@ S: 160 00 Praha 6
 S: Czech Republic
 
 N: Niels Kristian Bech Jensen
-E: nkbj@image.dk
-W: http://www.image.dk/~nkbj
+E: nkbj1970@hotmail.com
 D: Miscellaneous kernel updates and fixes.
-S: Dr. Holsts Vej 34, lejl. 164
-S: DK-8230 Åbyhøj
-S: Denmark
 
 N: Michael K. Johnson
 E: johnsonm@redhat.com
@@ -3400,10 +3401,10 @@ S: Czech Republic
 
 N: Thibaut Varene
 E: T-Bone@parisc-linux.org
-W: http://www.parisc-linux.org/
+W: http://www.parisc-linux.org/~varenet/
 P: 1024D/B7D2F063 E67C 0D43 A75E 12A5 BB1C  FA2F 1E32 C3DA B7D2 F063
 D: PA-RISC port minion, PDC and GSCPS2 drivers, debuglocks and other bits
-D: Some bits in an ARM port, S1D13XXX FB driver, random patches here and there
+D: Some ARM at91rm9200 bits, S1D13XXX FB driver, random patches here and there
 D: AD1889 sound driver
 S: Paris, France
 

Documentation/ABI/README

@@ -0,0 +1,77 @@
+This directory attempts to document the ABI between the Linux kernel and
+userspace, and the relative stability of these interfaces.  Due to the
+everchanging nature of Linux, and the differing maturity levels, these
+interfaces should be used by userspace programs in different ways.
+
+We have four different levels of ABI stability, as shown by the four
+different subdirectories in this location.  Interfaces may change levels
+of stability according to the rules described below.
+
+The different levels of stability are:
+
+  stable/
+	This directory documents the interfaces that the developer has
+	defined to be stable.  Userspace programs are free to use these
+	interfaces with no restrictions, and backward compatibility for
+	them will be guaranteed for at least 2 years.  Most interfaces
+	(like syscalls) are expected to never change and always be
+	available.
+
+  testing/
+	This directory documents interfaces that are felt to be stable,
+	as the main development of this interface has been completed.
+	The interface can be changed to add new features, but the
+	current interface will not break by doing this, unless grave
+	errors or security problems are found in them.  Userspace
+	programs can start to rely on these interfaces, but they must be
+	aware of changes that can occur before these interfaces move to
+	be marked stable.  Programs that use these interfaces are
+	strongly encouraged to add their name to the description of
+	these interfaces, so that the kernel developers can easily
+	notify them if any changes occur (see the description of the
+	layout of the files below for details on how to do this.)
+
+  obsolete/
+  	This directory documents interfaces that are still remaining in
+	the kernel, but are marked to be removed at some later point in
+	time.  The description of the interface will document the reason
+	why it is obsolete and when it can be expected to be removed.
+	The file Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt may describe
+	some of these interfaces, giving a schedule for when they will
+	be removed.
+
+  removed/
+	This directory contains a list of the old interfaces that have
+	been removed from the kernel.
+
+Every file in these directories will contain the following information:
+
+What:		Short description of the interface
+Date:		Date created
+KernelVersion:	Kernel version this feature first showed up in.
+Contact:	Primary contact for this interface (may be a mailing list)
+Description:	Long description of the interface and how to use it.
+Users:		All users of this interface who wish to be notified when
+		it changes.  This is very important for interfaces in
+		the "testing" stage, so that kernel developers can work
+		with userspace developers to ensure that things do not
+		break in ways that are unacceptable.  It is also
+		important to get feedback for these interfaces to make
+		sure they are working in a proper way and do not need to
+		be changed further.
+
+
+How things move between levels:
+
+Interfaces in stable may move to obsolete, as long as the proper
+notification is given.
+
+Interfaces may be removed from obsolete and the kernel as long as the
+documented amount of time has gone by.
+
+Interfaces in the testing state can move to the stable state when the
+developers feel they are finished.  They cannot be removed from the
+kernel tree without going through the obsolete state first.
+
+It's up to the developer to place their interfaces in the category they
+wish for it to start out in.

Documentation/ABI/obsolete/devfs

@@ -0,0 +1,13 @@
+What:		devfs
+Date:		July 2005
+Contact:	Greg Kroah-Hartman <gregkh@suse.de>
+Description:
+	devfs has been unmaintained for a number of years, has unfixable
+	races, contains a naming policy within the kernel that is
+	against the LSB, and can be replaced by using udev.
+	The files fs/devfs/*, include/linux/devfs_fs*.h will be removed,
+	along with the the assorted devfs function calls throughout the
+	kernel tree.
+
+Users:
+

Documentation/ABI/stable/syscalls

@@ -0,0 +1,10 @@
+What:		The kernel syscall interface
+Description:
+	This interface matches much of the POSIX interface and is based
+	on it and other Unix based interfaces.  It will only be added to
+	over time, and not have things removed from it.
+
+	Note that this interface is different for every architecture
+	that Linux supports.  Please see the architecture-specific
+	documentation for details on the syscall numbers that are to be
+	mapped to each syscall.

Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-module

@@ -0,0 +1,30 @@
+What:		/sys/module
+Description:
+	The /sys/module tree consists of the following structure:
+
+	/sys/module/MODULENAME
+		The name of the module that is in the kernel.  This
+		module name will show up either if the module is built
+		directly into the kernel, or if it is loaded as a
+		dyanmic module.
+
+	/sys/module/MODULENAME/parameters
+		This directory contains individual files that are each
+		individual parameters of the module that are able to be
+		changed at runtime.  See the individual module
+		documentation as to the contents of these parameters and
+		what they accomplish.
+
+		Note: The individual parameter names and values are not
+		considered stable, only the fact that they will be
+		placed in this location within sysfs.  See the
+		individual driver documentation for details as to the
+		stability of the different parameters.
+
+	/sys/module/MODULENAME/refcnt
+		If the module is able to be unloaded from the kernel, this file
+		will contain the current reference count of the module.
+
+		Note: If the module is built into the kernel, or if the
+		CONFIG_MODULE_UNLOAD kernel configuration value is not enabled,
+		this file will not be present.

Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class

@@ -0,0 +1,16 @@
+What:		/sys/class/
+Date:		Febuary 2006
+Contact:	Greg Kroah-Hartman <gregkh@suse.de>
+Description:
+		The /sys/class directory will consist of a group of
+		subdirectories describing individual classes of devices
+		in the kernel.  The individual directories will consist
+		of either subdirectories, or symlinks to other
+		directories.
+
+		All programs that use this directory tree must be able
+		to handle both subdirectories or symlinks in order to
+		work properly.
+
+Users:
+	udev <linux-hotplug-devel@lists.sourceforge.net>

Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices

@@ -0,0 +1,25 @@
+What:		/sys/devices
+Date:		February 2006
+Contact:	Greg Kroah-Hartman <gregkh@suse.de>
+Description:
+		The /sys/devices tree contains a snapshot of the
+		internal state of the kernel device tree.  Devices will
+		be added and removed dynamically as the machine runs,
+		and between different kernel versions, the layout of the
+		devices within this tree will change.
+
+		Please do not rely on the format of this tree because of
+		this.  If a program wishes to find different things in
+		the tree, please use the /sys/class structure and rely
+		on the symlinks there to point to the proper location
+		within the /sys/devices tree of the individual devices.
+		Or rely on the uevent messages to notify programs of
+		devices being added and removed from this tree to find
+		the location of those devices.
+
+		Note that sometimes not all devices along the directory
+		chain will have emitted uevent messages, so userspace
+		programs must be able to handle such occurrences.
+
+Users:
+	udev <linux-hotplug-devel@lists.sourceforge.net>

Documentation/Changes

@@ -181,8 +181,8 @@ Intel IA32 microcode
 --------------------
 
 A driver has been added to allow updating of Intel IA32 microcode,
-accessible as both a devfs regular file and as a normal (misc)
-character device.  If you are not using devfs you may need to:
+accessible as a normal (misc) character device.  If you are not using
+udev you may need to:
 
 mkdir /dev/cpu
 mknod /dev/cpu/microcode c 10 184
@@ -201,7 +201,9 @@ with programs using shared memory.
 udev
 ----
 udev is a userspace application for populating /dev dynamically with
-only entries for devices actually present. udev replaces devfs.
+only entries for devices actually present.  udev replaces the basic
+functionality of devfs, while allowing persistant device naming for
+devices.
 
 FUSE
 ----
@@ -231,18 +233,13 @@ The PPP driver has been restructured to support multilink and to
 enable it to operate over diverse media layers.  If you use PPP,
 upgrade pppd to at least 2.4.0.
 
-If you are not using devfs, you must have the device file /dev/ppp
+If you are not using udev, you must have the device file /dev/ppp
 which can be made by:
 
 mknod /dev/ppp c 108 0
 
 as root.
 
-If you use devfsd and build ppp support as modules, you will need
-the following in your /etc/devfsd.conf file:
-
-LOOKUP	PPP	MODLOAD
-
 Isdn4k-utils
 ------------
 

Documentation/CodingStyle

@@ -155,7 +155,83 @@ problem, which is called the function-growth-hormone-imbalance syndrome.
 See next chapter.
 
 
-		Chapter 5: Functions
+		Chapter 5: Typedefs
+
+Please don't use things like "vps_t".
+
+It's a _mistake_ to use typedef for structures and pointers. When you see a
+
+	vps_t a;
+
+in the source, what does it mean?
+
+In contrast, if it says
+
+	struct virtual_container *a;
+
+you can actually tell what "a" is.
+
+Lots of people think that typedefs "help readability". Not so. They are
+useful only for:
+
+ (a) totally opaque objects (where the typedef is actively used to _hide_
+     what the object is).
+
+     Example: "pte_t" etc. opaque objects that you can only access using
+     the proper accessor functions.
+
+     NOTE! Opaqueness and "accessor functions" are not good in themselves.
+     The reason we have them for things like pte_t etc. is that there
+     really is absolutely _zero_ portably accessible information there.
+
+ (b) Clear integer types, where the abstraction _helps_ avoid confusion
+     whether it is "int" or "long".
+
+     u8/u16/u32 are perfectly fine typedefs, although they fit into
+     category (d) better than here.
+
+     NOTE! Again - there needs to be a _reason_ for this. If something is
+     "unsigned long", then there's no reason to do
+
+	typedef unsigned long myflags_t;
+
+     but if there is a clear reason for why it under certain circumstances
+     might be an "unsigned int" and under other configurations might be
+     "unsigned long", then by all means go ahead and use a typedef.
+
+ (c) when you use sparse to literally create a _new_ type for
+     type-checking.
+
+ (d) New types which are identical to standard C99 types, in certain
+     exceptional circumstances.
+
+     Although it would only take a short amount of time for the eyes and
+     brain to become accustomed to the standard types like 'uint32_t',
+     some people object to their use anyway.
+
+     Therefore, the Linux-specific 'u8/u16/u32/u64' types and their
+     signed equivalents which are identical to standard types are
+     permitted -- although they are not mandatory in new code of your
+     own.
+
+     When editing existing code which already uses one or the other set
+     of types, you should conform to the existing choices in that code.
+
+ (e) Types safe for use in userspace.
+
+     In certain structures which are visible to userspace, we cannot
+     require C99 types and cannot use the 'u32' form above. Thus, we
+     use __u32 and similar types in all structures which are shared
+     with userspace.
+
+Maybe there are other cases too, but the rule should basically be to NEVER
+EVER use a typedef unless you can clearly match one of those rules.
+
+In general, a pointer, or a struct that has elements that can reasonably
+be directly accessed should _never_ be a typedef.
+
+
+		Chapter 6: Functions
 
 Functions should be short and sweet, and do just one thing.  They should
 fit on one or two screenfuls of text (the ISO/ANSI screen size is 80x24,
@@ -183,7 +259,7 @@ and it gets confused.  You know you're brilliant, but maybe you'd like
 to understand what you did 2 weeks from now.
 
 
-		Chapter 6: Centralized exiting of functions
+		Chapter 7: Centralized exiting of functions
 
 Albeit deprecated by some people, the equivalent of the goto statement is
 used frequently by compilers in form of the unconditional jump instruction.
@@ -220,7 +296,7 @@ out:
 	return result;
 }
 
-		Chapter 7: Commenting
+		Chapter 8: Commenting
 
 Comments are good, but there is also a danger of over-commenting.  NEVER
 try to explain HOW your code works in a comment: it's much better to
@@ -240,7 +316,7 @@ When commenting the kernel API functions, please use the kerneldoc format.
 See the files Documentation/kernel-doc-nano-HOWTO.txt and scripts/kernel-doc
 for details.
 
-		Chapter 8: You've made a mess of it
+		Chapter 9: You've made a mess of it
 
 That's OK, we all do.  You've probably been told by your long-time Unix
 user helper that "GNU emacs" automatically formats the C sources for
@@ -288,7 +364,7 @@ re-formatting you may want to take a look at the man page.  But
 remember: "indent" is not a fix for bad programming.
 
 
-		Chapter 9: Configuration-files
+		Chapter 10: Configuration-files
 
 For configuration options (arch/xxx/Kconfig, and all the Kconfig files),
 somewhat different indentation is used.
@@ -313,7 +389,7 @@ support for file-systems, for instance) should be denoted (DANGEROUS), other
 experimental options should be denoted (EXPERIMENTAL).
 
 
-		Chapter 10: Data structures
+		Chapter 11: Data structures
 
 Data structures that have visibility outside the single-threaded
 environment they are created and destroyed in should always have
@@ -344,7 +420,7 @@ Remember: if another thread can find your data structure, and you don't
 have a reference count on it, you almost certainly have a bug.
 
 
-		Chapter 11: Macros, Enums and RTL
+		Chapter 12: Macros, Enums and RTL
 
 Names of macros defining constants and labels in enums are capitalized.
 
@@ -399,7 +475,7 @@ The cpp manual deals with macros exhaustively. The gcc internals manual also
 covers RTL which is used frequently with assembly language in the kernel.
 
 
-		Chapter 12: Printing kernel messages
+		Chapter 13: Printing kernel messages
 
 Kernel developers like to be seen as literate. Do mind the spelling
 of kernel messages to make a good impression. Do not use crippled
@@ -410,7 +486,7 @@ Kernel messages do not have to be terminated with a period.
 Printing numbers in parentheses (%d) adds no value and should be avoided.
 
 
-		Chapter 13: Allocating memory
+		Chapter 14: Allocating memory
 
 The kernel provides the following general purpose memory allocators:
 kmalloc(), kzalloc(), kcalloc(), and vmalloc().  Please refer to the API
@@ -429,7 +505,7 @@ from void pointer to any other pointer type is guaranteed by the C programming
 language.
 
 
-		Chapter 14: The inline disease
+		Chapter 15: The inline disease
 
 There appears to be a common misperception that gcc has a magic "make me
 faster" speedup option called "inline". While the use of inlines can be
@@ -457,7 +533,7 @@ something it would have done anyway.
 
 
 
-		Chapter 15: References
+		Appendix I: References
 
 The C Programming Language, Second Edition
 by Brian W. Kernighan and Dennis M. Ritchie.
@@ -481,4 +557,4 @@ Kernel CodingStyle, by greg@kroah.com at OLS 2002:
 http://www.kroah.com/linux/talks/ols_2002_kernel_codingstyle_talk/html/
 
 --
-Last updated on 30 December 2005 by a community effort on LKML.
+Last updated on 30 April 2006.

Documentation/DMA-mapping.txt

@@ -698,12 +698,12 @@ these interfaces.  Remember that, as defined, consistent mappings are
 always going to be SAC addressable.
 
 The first thing your driver needs to do is query the PCI platform
-layer with your devices DAC addressing capabilities:
+layer if it is capable of handling your devices DAC addressing
+capabilities:
 
-	int pci_dac_set_dma_mask(struct pci_dev *pdev, u64 mask);
+	int pci_dac_dma_supported(struct pci_dev *hwdev, u64 mask);
 
-This routine behaves identically to pci_set_dma_mask.  You may not
-use the following interfaces if this routine fails.
+You may not use the following interfaces if this routine fails.
 
 Next, DMA addresses using this API are kept track of using the
 dma64_addr_t type.  It is guaranteed to be big enough to hold any

Documentation/DocBook/Makefile

@@ -10,7 +10,8 @@ DOCBOOKS := wanbook.xml z8530book.xml mcabook.xml videobook.xml \
 	    kernel-hacking.xml kernel-locking.xml deviceiobook.xml \
 	    procfs-guide.xml writing_usb_driver.xml \
 	    kernel-api.xml journal-api.xml lsm.xml usb.xml \
-	    gadget.xml libata.xml mtdnand.xml librs.xml rapidio.xml
+	    gadget.xml libata.xml mtdnand.xml librs.xml rapidio.xml \
+	    genericirq.xml
 
 ###
 # The build process is as follows (targets):

Documentation/DocBook/genericirq.tmpl

@@ -0,0 +1,474 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
+<!DOCTYPE book PUBLIC "-//OASIS//DTD DocBook XML V4.1.2//EN"
+	"http://www.oasis-open.org/docbook/xml/4.1.2/docbookx.dtd" []>
+
+<book id="Generic-IRQ-Guide">
+ <bookinfo>
+  <title>Linux generic IRQ handling</title>
+
+  <authorgroup>
+   <author>
+    <firstname>Thomas</firstname>
+    <surname>Gleixner</surname>
+    <affiliation>
+     <address>
+      <email>tglx@linutronix.de</email>
+     </address>
+    </affiliation>
+   </author>
+   <author>
+    <firstname>Ingo</firstname>
+    <surname>Molnar</surname>
+    <affiliation>
+     <address>
+      <email>mingo@elte.hu</email>
+     </address>
+    </affiliation>
+   </author>
+  </authorgroup>
+
+  <copyright>
+   <year>2005-2006</year>
+   <holder>Thomas Gleixner</holder>
+  </copyright>
+  <copyright>
+   <year>2005-2006</year>
+   <holder>Ingo Molnar</holder>
+  </copyright>
+
+  <legalnotice>
+   <para>
+     This documentation is free software; you can redistribute
+     it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public
+     License version 2 as published by the Free Software Foundation.
+   </para>
+
+   <para>
+     This program is distributed in the hope that it will be
+     useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied
+     warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
+     See the GNU General Public License for more details.
+   </para>
+
+   <para>
+     You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public
+     License along with this program; if not, write to the Free
+     Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston,
+     MA 02111-1307 USA
+   </para>
+
+   <para>
+     For more details see the file COPYING in the source
+     distribution of Linux.
+   </para>
+  </legalnotice>
+ </bookinfo>
+
+<toc></toc>
+
+  <chapter id="intro">
+    <title>Introduction</title>
+    <para>
+	The generic interrupt handling layer is designed to provide a
+	complete abstraction of interrupt handling for device drivers.
+	It is able to handle all the different types of interrupt controller
+	hardware. Device drivers use generic API functions to request, enable,
+	disable and free interrupts. The drivers do not have to know anything
+	about interrupt hardware details, so they can be used on different
+	platforms without code changes.
+    </para>
+    <para>
+  	This documentation is provided to developers who want to implement
+	an interrupt subsystem based for their architecture, with the help
+	of the generic IRQ handling layer.
+    </para>
+  </chapter>
+
+  <chapter id="rationale">
+    <title>Rationale</title>
+	<para>
+	The original implementation of interrupt handling in Linux is using
+	the __do_IRQ() super-handler, which is able to deal with every
+	type of interrupt logic.
+	</para>
+	<para>
+	Originally, Russell King identified different types of handlers to
+	build a quite universal set for the ARM interrupt handler
+	implementation in Linux 2.5/2.6. He distinguished between:
+	<itemizedlist>
+	  <listitem><para>Level type</para></listitem>
+	  <listitem><para>Edge type</para></listitem>
+	  <listitem><para>Simple type</para></listitem>
+	</itemizedlist>
+	In the SMP world of the __do_IRQ() super-handler another type
+	was identified:
+	<itemizedlist>
+	  <listitem><para>Per CPU type</para></listitem>
+	</itemizedlist>
+	</para>
+	<para>
+	This split implementation of highlevel IRQ handlers allows us to
+	optimize the flow of the interrupt handling for each specific
+	interrupt type. This reduces complexity in that particular codepath
+	and allows the optimized handling of a given type.
+	</para>
+	<para>
+	The original general IRQ implementation used hw_interrupt_type
+	structures and their ->ack(), ->end() [etc.] callbacks to
+	differentiate the flow control in the super-handler. This leads to
+	a mix of flow logic and lowlevel hardware logic, and it also leads
+	to unnecessary code duplication: for example in i386, there is a
+	ioapic_level_irq and a ioapic_edge_irq irq-type which share many
+	of the lowlevel details but have different flow handling.
+	</para>
+	<para>
+	A more natural abstraction is the clean separation of the
+	'irq flow' and the 'chip details'.
+	</para>
+	<para>
+	Analysing a couple of architecture's IRQ subsystem implementations
+	reveals that most of them can use a generic set of 'irq flow'
+	methods and only need to add the chip level specific code.
+	The separation is also valuable for (sub)architectures
+	which need specific quirks in the irq flow itself but not in the
+	chip-details - and thus provides a more transparent IRQ subsystem
+	design.
+	</para>
+	<para>
+	Each interrupt descriptor is assigned its own highlevel flow
+	handler, which is normally one of the generic
+	implementations. (This highlevel flow handler implementation also
+	makes it simple to provide demultiplexing handlers which can be
+	found in embedded platforms on various architectures.)
+	</para>
+	<para>
+	The separation makes the generic interrupt handling layer more
+	flexible and extensible. For example, an (sub)architecture can
+	use a generic irq-flow implementation for 'level type' interrupts
+	and add a (sub)architecture specific 'edge type' implementation.
+	</para>
+	<para>
+	To make the transition to the new model easier and prevent the
+	breakage of existing implementations, the __do_IRQ() super-handler
+	is still available. This leads to a kind of duality for the time
+	being. Over time the new model should be used in more and more
+	architectures, as it enables smaller and cleaner IRQ subsystems.
+	</para>
+  </chapter>
+  <chapter id="bugs">
+    <title>Known Bugs And Assumptions</title>
+    <para>
+	None (knock on wood).
+    </para>
+  </chapter>
+
+  <chapter id="Abstraction">
+    <title>Abstraction layers</title>
+    <para>
+	There are three main levels of abstraction in the interrupt code:
+	<orderedlist>
+	  <listitem><para>Highlevel driver API</para></listitem>
+	  <listitem><para>Highlevel IRQ flow handlers</para></listitem>
+	  <listitem><para>Chiplevel hardware encapsulation</para></listitem>
+	</orderedlist>
+    </para>
+    <sect1>
+	<title>Interrupt control flow</title>
+	<para>
+	Each interrupt is described by an interrupt descriptor structure
+	irq_desc. The interrupt is referenced by an 'unsigned int' numeric
+	value which selects the corresponding interrupt decription structure
+	in the descriptor structures array.
+	The descriptor structure contains status information and pointers
+	to the interrupt flow method and the interrupt chip structure
+	which are assigned to this interrupt.
+	</para>
+	<para>
+	Whenever an interrupt triggers, the lowlevel arch code calls into
+	the generic interrupt code by calling desc->handle_irq().
+	This highlevel IRQ handling function only uses desc->chip primitives
+	referenced by the assigned chip descriptor structure.
+	</para>
+    </sect1>
+    <sect1>
+	<title>Highlevel Driver API</title>
+	<para>
+	  The highlevel Driver API consists of following functions:
+	  <itemizedlist>
+	  <listitem><para>request_irq()</para></listitem>
+	  <listitem><para>free_irq()</para></listitem>
+	  <listitem><para>disable_irq()</para></listitem>
+	  <listitem><para>enable_irq()</para></listitem>
+	  <listitem><para>disable_irq_nosync() (SMP only)</para></listitem>
+	  <listitem><para>synchronize_irq() (SMP only)</para></listitem>
+	  <listitem><para>set_irq_type()</para></listitem>
+	  <listitem><para>set_irq_wake()</para></listitem>
+	  <listitem><para>set_irq_data()</para></listitem>
+	  <listitem><para>set_irq_chip()</para></listitem>
+	  <listitem><para>set_irq_chip_data()</para></listitem>
+          </itemizedlist>
+	  See the autogenerated function documentation for details.
+	</para>
+    </sect1>
+    <sect1>
+	<title>Highlevel IRQ flow handlers</title>
+	<para>
+	  The generic layer provides a set of pre-defined irq-flow methods:
+	  <itemizedlist>
+	  <listitem><para>handle_level_irq</para></listitem>
+	  <listitem><para>handle_edge_irq</para></listitem>
+	  <listitem><para>handle_simple_irq</para></listitem>
+	  <listitem><para>handle_percpu_irq</para></listitem>
+	  </itemizedlist>
+	  The interrupt flow handlers (either predefined or architecture
+	  specific) are assigned to specific interrupts by the architecture
+	  either during bootup or during device initialization.
+	</para>
+	<sect2>
+	<title>Default flow implementations</title>
+	    <sect3>
+	 	<title>Helper functions</title>
+		<para>
+		The helper functions call the chip primitives and
+		are used by the default flow implementations.
+		The following helper functions are implemented (simplified excerpt):
+		<programlisting>
+default_enable(irq)
+{
+	desc->chip->unmask(irq);
+}
+
+default_disable(irq)
+{
+	if (!delay_disable(irq))
+		desc->chip->mask(irq);
+}
+
+default_ack(irq)
+{
+	chip->ack(irq);
+}
+
+default_mask_ack(irq)
+{
+	if (chip->mask_ack) {
+		chip->mask_ack(irq);
+	} else {
+		chip->mask(irq);
+		chip->ack(irq);
+	}
+}
+
+noop(irq)
+{
+}
+
+		</programlisting>
+	        </para>
+	    </sect3>
+	</sect2>
+	<sect2>
+	<title>Default flow handler implementations</title>
+	    <sect3>
+	 	<title>Default Level IRQ flow handler</title>
+		<para>
+		handle_level_irq provides a generic implementation
+		for level-triggered interrupts.
+		</para>
+		<para>
+		The following control flow is implemented (simplified excerpt):
+		<programlisting>
+desc->chip->start();
+handle_IRQ_event(desc->action);
+desc->chip->end();
+		</programlisting>
+		</para>
+   	    </sect3>
+	    <sect3>
+	 	<title>Default Edge IRQ flow handler</title>
+		<para>
+		handle_edge_irq provides a generic implementation
+		for edge-triggered interrupts.
+		</para>
+		<para>
+		The following control flow is implemented (simplified excerpt):
+		<programlisting>
+if (desc->status &amp; running) {
+	desc->chip->hold();
+	desc->status |= pending | masked;
+	return;
+}
+desc->chip->start();
+desc->status |= running;
+do {
+	if (desc->status &amp; masked)
+		desc->chip->enable();
+	desc-status &amp;= ~pending;
+	handle_IRQ_event(desc->action);
+} while (status &amp; pending);
+desc-status &amp;= ~running;
+desc->chip->end();
+		</programlisting>
+		</para>
+   	    </sect3>
+	    <sect3>
+	 	<title>Default simple IRQ flow handler</title>
+		<para>
+		handle_simple_irq provides a generic implementation
+		for simple interrupts.
+		</para>
+		<para>
+		Note: The simple flow handler does not call any
+		handler/chip primitives.
+		</para>
+		<para>
+		The following control flow is implemented (simplified excerpt):
+		<programlisting>
+handle_IRQ_event(desc->action);
+		</programlisting>
+		</para>
+   	    </sect3>
+	    <sect3>
+	 	<title>Default per CPU flow handler</title>
+		<para>
+		handle_percpu_irq provides a generic implementation
+		for per CPU interrupts.
+		</para>
+		<para>
+		Per CPU interrupts are only available on SMP and
+		the handler provides a simplified version without
+		locking.
+		</para>
+		<para>
+		The following control flow is implemented (simplified excerpt):
+		<programlisting>
+desc->chip->start();
+handle_IRQ_event(desc->action);
+desc->chip->end();
+		</programlisting>
+		</para>
+   	    </sect3>
+	</sect2>
+	<sect2>
+	<title>Quirks and optimizations</title>
+	<para>
+	The generic functions are intended for 'clean' architectures and chips,
+	which have no platform-specific IRQ handling quirks. If an architecture
+	needs to implement quirks on the 'flow' level then it can do so by
+	overriding the highlevel irq-flow handler.
+	</para>
+	</sect2>
+	<sect2>
+	<title>Delayed interrupt disable</title>
+	<para>
+	This per interrupt selectable feature, which was introduced by Russell
+	King in the ARM interrupt implementation, does not mask an interrupt
+	at the hardware level when disable_irq() is called. The interrupt is
+	kept enabled and is masked in the flow handler when an interrupt event
+	happens. This prevents losing edge interrupts on hardware which does
+	not store an edge interrupt event while the interrupt is disabled at
+	the hardware level. When an interrupt arrives while the IRQ_DISABLED
+	flag is set, then the interrupt is masked at the hardware level and
+	the IRQ_PENDING bit is set. When the interrupt is re-enabled by
+	enable_irq() the pending bit is checked and if it is set, the
+	interrupt is resent either via hardware or by a software resend
+	mechanism. (It's necessary to enable CONFIG_HARDIRQS_SW_RESEND when
+	you want to use the delayed interrupt disable feature and your
+	hardware is not capable of retriggering	an interrupt.)
+	The delayed interrupt disable can be runtime enabled, per interrupt,
+	by setting the IRQ_DELAYED_DISABLE flag in the irq_desc status field.
+	</para>
+	</sect2>
+    </sect1>
+    <sect1>
+	<title>Chiplevel hardware encapsulation</title>
+	<para>
+	The chip level hardware descriptor structure irq_chip
+	contains all the direct chip relevant functions, which
+	can be utilized by the irq flow implementations.
+	  <itemizedlist>
+	  <listitem><para>ack()</para></listitem>
+	  <listitem><para>mask_ack() - Optional, recommended for performance</para></listitem>
+	  <listitem><para>mask()</para></listitem>
+	  <listitem><para>unmask()</para></listitem>
+	  <listitem><para>retrigger() - Optional</para></listitem>
+	  <listitem><para>set_type() - Optional</para></listitem>
+	  <listitem><para>set_wake() - Optional</para></listitem>
+	  </itemizedlist>
+	These primitives are strictly intended to mean what they say: ack means
+	ACK, masking means masking of an IRQ line, etc. It is up to the flow
+	handler(s) to use these basic units of lowlevel functionality.
+	</para>
+    </sect1>
+  </chapter>
+
+  <chapter id="doirq">
+     <title>__do_IRQ entry point</title>
+     <para>
+ 	The original implementation __do_IRQ() is an alternative entry
+	point for all types of interrupts.
+     </para>
+     <para>
+	This handler turned out to be not suitable for all
+	interrupt hardware and was therefore reimplemented with split
+	functionality for egde/level/simple/percpu interrupts. This is not
+	only a functional optimization. It also shortens code paths for
+	interrupts.
+      </para>
+      <para>
+	To make use of the split implementation, replace the call to
+	__do_IRQ by a call to desc->chip->handle_irq() and associate
+        the appropriate handler function to desc->chip->handle_irq().
+	In most cases the generic handler implementations should
+	be sufficient.
+     </para>
+  </chapter>
+
+  <chapter id="locking">
+     <title>Locking on SMP</title>
+     <para>
+	The locking of chip registers is up to the architecture that
+	defines the chip primitives. There is a chip->lock field that can be used
+	for serialization, but the generic layer does not touch it. The per-irq
+	structure is protected via desc->lock, by the generic layer.
+     </para>
+  </chapter>
+  <chapter id="structs">
+     <title>Structures</title>
+     <para>
+     This chapter contains the autogenerated documentation of the structures which are
+     used in the generic IRQ layer.
+     </para>
+!Iinclude/linux/irq.h
+  </chapter>
+
+  <chapter id="pubfunctions">
+     <title>Public Functions Provided</title>
+     <para>
+     This chapter contains the autogenerated documentation of the kernel API functions
+      which are exported.
+     </para>
+!Ekernel/irq/manage.c
+!Ekernel/irq/chip.c
+  </chapter>
+
+  <chapter id="intfunctions">
+     <title>Internal Functions Provided</title>
+     <para>
+     This chapter contains the autogenerated documentation of the internal functions.
+     </para>
+!Ikernel/irq/handle.c
+!Ikernel/irq/chip.c
+  </chapter>
+
+  <chapter id="credits">
+     <title>Credits</title>
+	<para>
+		The following people have contributed to this document:
+		<orderedlist>
+			<listitem><para>Thomas Gleixner<email>tglx@linutronix.de</email></para></listitem>
+			<listitem><para>Ingo Molnar<email>mingo@elte.hu</email></para></listitem>
+		</orderedlist>
+	</para>
+  </chapter>
+</book>

Documentation/DocBook/kernel-api.tmpl

@@ -62,6 +62,8 @@
      <sect1><title>Internal Functions</title>
 !Ikernel/exit.c
 !Ikernel/signal.c
+!Iinclude/linux/kthread.h
+!Ekernel/kthread.c
      </sect1>
 
      <sect1><title>Kernel objects manipulation</title>
@@ -114,9 +116,33 @@ X!Ilib/string.c
      </sect1>
   </chapter>
 
+  <chapter id="kernel-lib">
+     <title>Basic Kernel Library Functions</title>
+
+     <para>
+       The Linux kernel provides more basic utility functions.
+     </para>
+
+     <sect1><title>Bitmap Operations</title>
+!Elib/bitmap.c
+!Ilib/bitmap.c
+     </sect1>
+
+     <sect1><title>Command-line Parsing</title>
+!Elib/cmdline.c
+     </sect1>
+
+     <sect1><title>CRC Functions</title>
+!Elib/crc16.c
+!Elib/crc32.c
+!Elib/crc-ccitt.c
+     </sect1>
+  </chapter>
+
   <chapter id="mm">
      <title>Memory Management in Linux</title>
      <sect1><title>The Slab Cache</title>
+!Iinclude/linux/slab.h
 !Emm/slab.c
      </sect1>
      <sect1><title>User Space Memory Access</title>
@@ -280,12 +306,13 @@ X!Ekernel/module.c
      <sect1><title>MTRR Handling</title>
 !Earch/i386/kernel/cpu/mtrr/main.c
      </sect1>
+
      <sect1><title>PCI Support Library</title>
 !Edrivers/pci/pci.c
 !Edrivers/pci/pci-driver.c
 !Edrivers/pci/remove.c
 !Edrivers/pci/pci-acpi.c
-<!-- kerneldoc does not understand to __devinit
+<!-- kerneldoc does not understand __devinit
 X!Edrivers/pci/search.c
  -->
 !Edrivers/pci/msi.c
@@ -314,9 +341,11 @@ X!Earch/i386/kernel/mca.c
      </sect1>
   </chapter>
 
-  <chapter id="devfs">
-     <title>The Device File System</title>
-!Efs/devfs/base.c
+  <chapter id="firmware">
+     <title>Firmware Interfaces</title>
+     <sect1><title>DMI Interfaces</title>
+!Edrivers/firmware/dmi_scan.c
+     </sect1>
   </chapter>
 
   <chapter id="sysfs">
@@ -331,6 +360,18 @@ X!Earch/i386/kernel/mca.c
 !Esecurity/security.c
   </chapter>
 
+  <chapter id="audit">
+     <title>Audit Interfaces</title>
+!Ekernel/audit.c
+!Ikernel/auditsc.c
+!Ikernel/auditfilter.c
+  </chapter>
+
+  <chapter id="accounting">
+     <title>Accounting Framework</title>
+!Ikernel/acct.c
+  </chapter>
+
   <chapter id="pmfuncs">
      <title>Power Management</title>
 !Ekernel/power/pm.c
@@ -390,7 +431,6 @@ X!Edrivers/pnp/system.c
      </sect1>
   </chapter>
 
-
   <chapter id="blkdev">
      <title>Block Devices</title>
 !Eblock/ll_rw_blk.c
@@ -401,6 +441,14 @@ X!Edrivers/pnp/system.c
 !Edrivers/char/misc.c
   </chapter>
 
+  <chapter id="parportdev">
+     <title>Parallel Port Devices</title>
+!Iinclude/linux/parport.h
+!Edrivers/parport/ieee1284.c
+!Edrivers/parport/share.c
+!Idrivers/parport/daisy.c
+  </chapter>
+
   <chapter id="viddev">
      <title>Video4Linux</title>
 !Edrivers/media/video/videodev.c

Documentation/DocBook/kernel-locking.tmpl

@@ -1590,7 +1590,7 @@ the amount of locking which needs to be done.
     <para>
       Our final dilemma is this: when can we actually destroy the
       removed element?  Remember, a reader might be stepping through
-      this element in the list right now: it we free this element and
+      this element in the list right now: if we free this element and
       the <symbol>next</symbol> pointer changes, the reader will jump
       off into garbage and crash.  We need to wait until we know that
       all the readers who were traversing the list when we deleted the

Documentation/DocBook/libata.tmpl

@@ -169,6 +169,22 @@ void (*tf_read) (struct ata_port *ap, struct ata_taskfile *tf);
 
 	</sect2>
 
+	<sect2><title>PIO data read/write</title>
+	<programlisting>
+void (*data_xfer) (struct ata_device *, unsigned char *, unsigned int, int);
+	</programlisting>
+
+	<para>
+All bmdma-style drivers must implement this hook.  This is the low-level
+operation that actually copies the data bytes during a PIO data
+transfer.
+Typically the driver
+will choose one of ata_pio_data_xfer_noirq(), ata_pio_data_xfer(), or
+ata_mmio_data_xfer().
+	</para>
+
+	</sect2>
+
 	<sect2><title>ATA command execute</title>
 	<programlisting>
 void (*exec_command)(struct ata_port *ap, struct ata_taskfile *tf);
@@ -204,11 +220,10 @@ command.
 	<programlisting>
 u8   (*check_status)(struct ata_port *ap);
 u8   (*check_altstatus)(struct ata_port *ap);
-u8   (*check_err)(struct ata_port *ap);
 	</programlisting>
 
 	<para>
-	Reads the Status/AltStatus/Error ATA shadow register from
+	Reads the Status/AltStatus ATA shadow register from
 	hardware.  On some hardware, reading the Status register has
 	the side effect of clearing the interrupt condition.
 	Most drivers for taskfile-based hardware use
@@ -269,23 +284,6 @@ void (*set_mode) (struct ata_port *ap);
 
 	</sect2>
 
-	<sect2><title>Reset ATA bus</title>
-	<programlisting>
-void (*phy_reset) (struct ata_port *ap);
-	</programlisting>
-
-	<para>
-	The very first step in the probe phase.  Actions vary depending
-	on the bus type, typically.  After waking up the device and probing
-	for device presence (PATA and SATA), typically a soft reset
-	(SRST) will be performed.  Drivers typically use the helper
-	functions ata_bus_reset() or sata_phy_reset() for this hook.
-	Many SATA drivers use sata_phy_reset() or call it from within
-	their own phy_reset() functions.
-	</para>
-
-	</sect2>
-
 	<sect2><title>Control PCI IDE BMDMA engine</title>
 	<programlisting>
 void (*bmdma_setup) (struct ata_queued_cmd *qc);
@@ -354,16 +352,74 @@ int (*qc_issue) (struct ata_queued_cmd *qc);
 
 	</sect2>
 
-	<sect2><title>Timeout (error) handling</title>
+	<sect2><title>Exception and probe handling (EH)</title>
 	<programlisting>
 void (*eng_timeout) (struct ata_port *ap);
+void (*phy_reset) (struct ata_port *ap);
 	</programlisting>
 
 	<para>
-This is a high level error handling function, called from the
-error handling thread, when a command times out.  Most newer
-hardware will implement its own error handling code here.  IDE BMDMA
-drivers may use the helper function ata_eng_timeout().
+Deprecated.  Use ->error_handler() instead.
+	</para>
+
+	<programlisting>
+void (*freeze) (struct ata_port *ap);
+void (*thaw) (struct ata_port *ap);
+	</programlisting>
+
+	<para>
+ata_port_freeze() is called when HSM violations or some other
+condition disrupts normal operation of the port.  A frozen port
+is not allowed to perform any operation until the port is
+thawed, which usually follows a successful reset.
+	</para>
+
+	<para>
+The optional ->freeze() callback can be used for freezing the port
+hardware-wise (e.g. mask interrupt and stop DMA engine).  If a
+port cannot be frozen hardware-wise, the interrupt handler
+must ack and clear interrupts unconditionally while the port
+is frozen.
+	</para>
+	<para>
+The optional ->thaw() callback is called to perform the opposite of ->freeze():
+prepare the port for normal operation once again.  Unmask interrupts,
+start DMA engine, etc.
+	</para>
+
+	<programlisting>
+void (*error_handler) (struct ata_port *ap);
+	</programlisting>
+
+	<para>
+->error_handler() is a driver's hook into probe, hotplug, and recovery
+and other exceptional conditions.  The primary responsibility of an
+implementation is to call ata_do_eh() or ata_bmdma_drive_eh() with a set
+of EH hooks as arguments:
+	</para>
+
+	<para>
+'prereset' hook (may be NULL) is called during an EH reset, before any other actions
+are taken.
+	</para>
+
+	<para>
+'postreset' hook (may be NULL) is called after the EH reset is performed.  Based on
+existing conditions, severity of the problem, and hardware capabilities,
+	</para>
+
+	<para>
+Either 'softreset' (may be NULL) or 'hardreset' (may be NULL) will be
+called to perform the low-level EH reset.
+	</para>
+
+	<programlisting>
+void (*post_internal_cmd) (struct ata_queued_cmd *qc);
+	</programlisting>
+
+	<para>
+Perform any hardware-specific actions necessary to finish processing
+after executing a probe-time or EH-time command via ata_exec_internal().
 	</para>
 
 	</sect2>

Documentation/DocBook/mtdnand.tmpl

@@ -109,7 +109,7 @@
 		for most of the implementations. These functions can be replaced by the
 		board driver if neccecary. Those functions are called via pointers in the
 		NAND chip description structure. The board driver can set the functions which
-		should be replaced by board dependend functions before calling nand_scan().
+		should be replaced by board dependent functions before calling nand_scan().
 		If the function pointer is NULL on entry to nand_scan() then the pointer
 		is set to the default function which is suitable for the detected chip type.
 		</para></listitem>
@@ -133,7 +133,7 @@
 	  	[REPLACEABLE]</para><para>
 		Replaceable members hold hardware related functions which can be 
 		provided by the board driver. The board driver can set the functions which
-		should be replaced by board dependend functions before calling nand_scan().
+		should be replaced by board dependent functions before calling nand_scan().
 		If the function pointer is NULL on entry to nand_scan() then the pointer
 		is set to the default function which is suitable for the detected chip type.
 		</para></listitem>
@@ -156,9 +156,8 @@
      	<title>Basic board driver</title>
 	<para>
 		For most boards it will be sufficient to provide just the
-		basic functions and fill out some really board dependend
+		basic functions and fill out some really board dependent
 		members in the nand chip description structure.
-		See drivers/mtd/nand/skeleton for reference.
 	</para>
 	<sect1>
 		<title>Basic defines</title>
@@ -189,9 +188,9 @@ static unsigned long baseaddr;
 	<sect1>
 		<title>Partition defines</title>
 		<para>
-			If you want to divide your device into parititions, then
-			enable the configuration switch CONFIG_MTD_PARITIONS and define
-			a paritioning scheme suitable to your board.
+			If you want to divide your device into partitions, then
+			enable the configuration switch CONFIG_MTD_PARTITIONS and define
+			a partitioning scheme suitable to your board.
 		</para>
 		<programlisting>
 #define NUM_PARTITIONS 2
@@ -1295,7 +1294,9 @@ in this page</entry>
      </para>
 !Idrivers/mtd/nand/nand_base.c
 !Idrivers/mtd/nand/nand_bbt.c
-!Idrivers/mtd/nand/nand_ecc.c
+<!-- No internal functions for kernel-doc:
+X!Idrivers/mtd/nand/nand_ecc.c
+-->
   </chapter>
 
   <chapter id="credits">

Documentation/DocBook/videobook.tmpl

@@ -976,7 +976,7 @@ static int camera_close(struct video_device *dev)
   <title>Interrupt Handling</title>
   <para>
         Our example handler is for an ISA bus device. If it was PCI you would be
-        able to share the interrupt and would have set SA_SHIRQ to indicate a 
+        able to share the interrupt and would have set IRQF_SHARED to indicate a
         shared IRQ. We pass the device pointer as the interrupt routine argument. We
         don't need to since we only support one card but doing this will make it
         easier to upgrade the driver for multiple devices in the future.

Documentation/IPMI.txt

@@ -10,7 +10,7 @@ standard for controlling intelligent devices that monitor a system.
 It provides for dynamic discovery of sensors in the system and the
 ability to monitor the sensors and be informed when the sensor's
 values change or go outside certain boundaries.  It also has a
-standardized database for field-replacable units (FRUs) and a watchdog
+standardized database for field-replaceable units (FRUs) and a watchdog
 timer.
 
 To use this, you need an interface to an IPMI controller in your
@@ -64,7 +64,7 @@ situation, you need to read the section below named 'The SI Driver' or
 IPMI defines a standard watchdog timer.  You can enable this with the
 'IPMI Watchdog Timer' config option.  If you compile the driver into
 the kernel, then via a kernel command-line option you can have the
-watchdog timer start as soon as it intitializes.  It also have a lot
+watchdog timer start as soon as it initializes.  It also have a lot
 of other options, see the 'Watchdog' section below for more details.
 Note that you can also have the watchdog continue to run if it is
 closed (by default it is disabled on close).  Go into the 'Watchdog

Documentation/IRQ.txt

@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+What is an IRQ?
+
+An IRQ is an interrupt request from a device.
+Currently they can come in over a pin, or over a packet.
+Several devices may be connected to the same pin thus
+sharing an IRQ.
+
+An IRQ number is a kernel identifier used to talk about a hardware
+interrupt source.  Typically this is an index into the global irq_desc
+array, but except for what linux/interrupt.h implements the details
+are architecture specific.
+
+An IRQ number is an enumeration of the possible interrupt sources on a
+machine.  Typically what is enumerated is the number of input pins on
+all of the interrupt controller in the system.  In the case of ISA
+what is enumerated are the 16 input pins on the two i8259 interrupt
+controllers.
+
+Architectures can assign additional meaning to the IRQ numbers, and
+are encouraged to in the case  where there is any manual configuration
+of the hardware involved.  The ISA IRQs are a classic example of
+assigning this kind of additional meaning.

Documentation/RCU/checklist.txt

@@ -144,9 +144,47 @@ over a rather long period of time, but improvements are always welcome!
 	whether the increased speed is worth it.
 
 8.	Although synchronize_rcu() is a bit slower than is call_rcu(),
-	it usually results in simpler code.  So, unless update performance
-	is important or the updaters cannot block, synchronize_rcu()
-	should be used in preference to call_rcu().
+	it usually results in simpler code.  So, unless update
+	performance is critically important or the updaters cannot block,
+	synchronize_rcu() should be used in preference to call_rcu().
+
+	An especially important property of the synchronize_rcu()
+	primitive is that it automatically self-limits: if grace periods
+	are delayed for whatever reason, then the synchronize_rcu()
+	primitive will correspondingly delay updates.  In contrast,
+	code using call_rcu() should explicitly limit update rate in
+	cases where grace periods are delayed, as failing to do so can
+	result in excessive realtime latencies or even OOM conditions.
+
+	Ways of gaining this self-limiting property when using call_rcu()
+	include:
+
+	a.	Keeping a count of the number of data-structure elements
+		used by the RCU-protected data structure, including those
+		waiting for a grace period to elapse.  Enforce a limit
+		on this number, stalling updates as needed to allow
+		previously deferred frees to complete.
+
+		Alternatively, limit only the number awaiting deferred
+		free rather than the total number of elements.
+
+	b.	Limiting update rate.  For example, if updates occur only
+		once per hour, then no explicit rate limiting is required,
+		unless your system is already badly broken.  The dcache
+		subsystem takes this approach -- updates are guarded
+		by a global lock, limiting their rate.
+
+	c.	Trusted update -- if updates can only be done manually by
+		superuser or some other trusted user, then it might not
+		be necessary to automatically limit them.  The theory
+		here is that superuser already has lots of ways to crash
+		the machine.
+
+	d.	Use call_rcu_bh() rather than call_rcu(), in order to take
+		advantage of call_rcu_bh()'s faster grace periods.
+
+	e.	Periodically invoke synchronize_rcu(), permitting a limited
+		number of updates per grace period.
 
 9.	All RCU list-traversal primitives, which include
 	list_for_each_rcu(), list_for_each_entry_rcu(),

Documentation/RCU/torture.txt

@@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ The CONFIG_RCU_TORTURE_TEST config option is available for all RCU
 implementations.  It creates an rcutorture kernel module that can
 be loaded to run a torture test.  The test periodically outputs
 status messages via printk(), which can be examined via the dmesg
-command (perhaps grepping for "rcutorture").  The test is started
+command (perhaps grepping for "torture").  The test is started
 when the module is loaded, and stops when the module is unloaded.
 
 However, actually setting this config option to "y" results in the system
@@ -35,6 +35,19 @@ stat_interval	The number of seconds between output of torture
 		be printed -only- when the module is unloaded, and this
 		is the default.
 
+shuffle_interval
+		The number of seconds to keep the test threads affinitied
+		to a particular subset of the CPUs.  Used in conjunction
+		with test_no_idle_hz.
+
+test_no_idle_hz	Whether or not to test the ability of RCU to operate in
+		a kernel that disables the scheduling-clock interrupt to
+		idle CPUs.  Boolean parameter, "1" to test, "0" otherwise.
+
+torture_type	The type of RCU to test: "rcu" for the rcu_read_lock()
+		API, "rcu_bh" for the rcu_read_lock_bh() API, and "srcu"
+		for the "srcu_read_lock()" API.
+
 verbose		Enable debug printk()s.  Default is disabled.
 
 
@@ -42,14 +55,14 @@ OUTPUT
 
 The statistics output is as follows:
 
-	rcutorture: --- Start of test: nreaders=16 stat_interval=0 verbose=0
-	rcutorture: rtc: 0000000000000000 ver: 1916 tfle: 0 rta: 1916 rtaf: 0 rtf: 1915
-	rcutorture: Reader Pipe:  1466408 9747 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
-	rcutorture: Reader Batch:  1464477 11678 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
-	rcutorture: Free-Block Circulation:  1915 1915 1915 1915 1915 1915 1915 1915 1915 1915 0
-	rcutorture: --- End of test
+	rcu-torture: --- Start of test: nreaders=16 stat_interval=0 verbose=0
+	rcu-torture: rtc: 0000000000000000 ver: 1916 tfle: 0 rta: 1916 rtaf: 0 rtf: 1915
+	rcu-torture: Reader Pipe:  1466408 9747 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
+	rcu-torture: Reader Batch:  1464477 11678 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
+	rcu-torture: Free-Block Circulation:  1915 1915 1915 1915 1915 1915 1915 1915 1915 1915 0
+	rcu-torture: --- End of test
 
-The command "dmesg | grep rcutorture:" will extract this information on
+The command "dmesg | grep torture:" will extract this information on
 most systems.  On more esoteric configurations, it may be necessary to
 use other commands to access the output of the printk()s used by
 the RCU torture test.  The printk()s use KERN_ALERT, so they should
@@ -115,8 +128,9 @@ The following script may be used to torture RCU:
 	modprobe rcutorture
 	sleep 100
 	rmmod rcutorture
-	dmesg | grep rcutorture:
+	dmesg | grep torture:
 
 The output can be manually inspected for the error flag of "!!!".
 One could of course create a more elaborate script that automatically
-checked for such errors.
+checked for such errors.  The "rmmod" command forces a "SUCCESS" or
+"FAILURE" indication to be printk()ed.

Documentation/RCU/whatisRCU.txt

@@ -184,7 +184,17 @@ synchronize_rcu()
 	blocking, it registers a function and argument which are invoked
 	after all ongoing RCU read-side critical sections have completed.
 	This callback variant is particularly useful in situations where
-	it is illegal to block.
+	it is illegal to block or where update-side performance is
+	critically important.
+
+	However, the call_rcu() API should not be used lightly, as use
+	of the synchronize_rcu() API generally results in simpler code.
+	In addition, the synchronize_rcu() API has the nice property
+	of automatically limiting update rate should grace periods
+	be delayed.  This property results in system resilience in face
+	of denial-of-service attacks.  Code using call_rcu() should limit
+	update rate in order to gain this same sort of resilience.  See
+	checklist.txt for some approaches to limiting the update rate.
 
 rcu_assign_pointer()
 
@@ -677,8 +687,9 @@ diff shows how closely related RCU and reader-writer locking can be.
 	+	spin_lock(&listmutex);
 		list_for_each_entry(p, head, lp) {
 			if (p->key == key) {
-				list_del(&p->list);
+	-			list_del(&p->list);
 	-			write_unlock(&listmutex);
+	+			list_del_rcu(&p->list);
 	+			spin_unlock(&listmutex);
 	+			synchronize_rcu();
 				kfree(p);
@@ -726,7 +737,7 @@ Or, for those who prefer a side-by-side listing:
  5   write_lock(&listmutex);            5   spin_lock(&listmutex);
  6   list_for_each_entry(p, head, lp) { 6   list_for_each_entry(p, head, lp) {
  7     if (p->key == key) {             7     if (p->key == key) {
- 8       list_del(&p->list);            8       list_del(&p->list);
+ 8       list_del(&p->list);            8       list_del_rcu(&p->list);
  9       write_unlock(&listmutex);      9       spin_unlock(&listmutex);
                                        10       synchronize_rcu();
 10       kfree(p);                     11       kfree(p);
@@ -790,7 +801,6 @@ RCU pointer update:
 
 RCU grace period:
 
-	synchronize_kernel (deprecated)
 	synchronize_net
 	synchronize_sched
 	synchronize_rcu

Documentation/README.DAC960

@@ -78,9 +78,9 @@ also known as "System Drives", and Drive Groups are also called "Packs".  Both
 terms are in use in the Mylex documentation; I have chosen to standardize on
 the more generic "Logical Drive" and "Drive Group".
 
-DAC960 RAID disk devices are named in the style of the Device File System
-(DEVFS).  The device corresponding to Logical Drive D on Controller C is
-referred to as /dev/rd/cCdD, and the partitions are called /dev/rd/cCdDp1
+DAC960 RAID disk devices are named in the style of the obsolete Device File
+System (DEVFS).  The device corresponding to Logical Drive D on Controller C
+is referred to as /dev/rd/cCdD, and the partitions are called /dev/rd/cCdDp1
 through /dev/rd/cCdDp7.  For example, partition 3 of Logical Drive 5 on
 Controller 2 is referred to as /dev/rd/c2d5p3.  Note that unlike with SCSI
 disks the device names will not change in the event of a disk drive failure.

Documentation/SubmitChecklist

@@ -0,0 +1,63 @@
+Linux Kernel patch sumbittal checklist
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+Here are some basic things that developers should do if they want to see their
+kernel patch submissions accepted more quickly.
+
+These are all above and beyond the documentation that is provided in
+Documentation/SubmittingPatches and elsewhere regarding submitting Linux
+kernel patches.
+
+
+
+1: Builds cleanly with applicable or modified CONFIG options =y, =m, and
+   =n.  No gcc warnings/errors, no linker warnings/errors.
+
+2: Passes allnoconfig, allmodconfig
+
+3: Builds on multiple CPU architectures by using local cross-compile tools
+   or something like PLM at OSDL.
+
+4: ppc64 is a good architecture for cross-compilation checking because it
+   tends to use `unsigned long' for 64-bit quantities.
+
+5: Matches kernel coding style(!)
+
+6: Any new or modified CONFIG options don't muck up the config menu.
+
+7: All new Kconfig options have help text.
+
+8: Has been carefully reviewed with respect to relevant Kconfig
+   combinations.  This is very hard to get right with testing -- brainpower
+   pays off here.
+
+9: Check cleanly with sparse.
+
+10: Use 'make checkstack' and 'make namespacecheck' and fix any problems
+    that they find.  Note: checkstack does not point out problems explicitly,
+    but any one function that uses more than 512 bytes on the stack is a
+    candidate for change.
+
+11: Include kernel-doc to document global kernel APIs.  (Not required for
+    static functions, but OK there also.) Use 'make htmldocs' or 'make
+    mandocs' to check the kernel-doc and fix any issues.
+
+12: Has been tested with CONFIG_PREEMPT, CONFIG_DEBUG_PREEMPT,
+    CONFIG_DEBUG_SLAB, CONFIG_DEBUG_PAGEALLOC, CONFIG_DEBUG_MUTEXES,
+    CONFIG_DEBUG_SPINLOCK, CONFIG_DEBUG_SPINLOCK_SLEEP all simultaneously
+    enabled.
+
+13: Has been build- and runtime tested with and without CONFIG_SMP and
+    CONFIG_PREEMPT.
+
+14: If the patch affects IO/Disk, etc: has been tested with and without
+    CONFIG_LBD.
+
+15: All codepaths have been exercised with all lockdep features enabled.
+
+16: All new /proc entries are documented under Documentation/
+
+17: All new kernel boot parameters are documented in
+    Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt.
+
+18: All new module parameters are documented with MODULE_PARM_DESC()

Documentation/accounting/delay-accounting.txt

@@ -0,0 +1,110 @@
+Delay accounting
+----------------
+
+Tasks encounter delays in execution when they wait
+for some kernel resource to become available e.g. a
+runnable task may wait for a free CPU to run on.
+
+The per-task delay accounting functionality measures
+the delays experienced by a task while
+
+a) waiting for a CPU (while being runnable)
+b) completion of synchronous block I/O initiated by the task
+c) swapping in pages
+
+and makes these statistics available to userspace through
+the taskstats interface.
+
+Such delays provide feedback for setting a task's cpu priority,
+io priority and rss limit values appropriately. Long delays for
+important tasks could be a trigger for raising its corresponding priority.
+
+The functionality, through its use of the taskstats interface, also provides
+delay statistics aggregated for all tasks (or threads) belonging to a
+thread group (corresponding to a traditional Unix process). This is a commonly
+needed aggregation that is more efficiently done by the kernel.
+
+Userspace utilities, particularly resource management applications, can also
+aggregate delay statistics into arbitrary groups. To enable this, delay
+statistics of a task are available both during its lifetime as well as on its
+exit, ensuring continuous and complete monitoring can be done.
+
+
+Interface
+---------
+
+Delay accounting uses the taskstats interface which is described
+in detail in a separate document in this directory. Taskstats returns a
+generic data structure to userspace corresponding to per-pid and per-tgid
+statistics. The delay accounting functionality populates specific fields of
+this structure. See
+     include/linux/taskstats.h
+for a description of the fields pertaining to delay accounting.
+It will generally be in the form of counters returning the cumulative
+delay seen for cpu, sync block I/O, swapin etc.
+
+Taking the difference of two successive readings of a given
+counter (say cpu_delay_total) for a task will give the delay
+experienced by the task waiting for the corresponding resource
+in that interval.
+
+When a task exits, records containing the per-task statistics
+are sent to userspace without requiring a command. If it is the last exiting
+task of a thread group, the per-tgid statistics are also sent. More details
+are given in the taskstats interface description.
+
+The getdelays.c userspace utility in this directory allows simple commands to
+be run and the corresponding delay statistics to be displayed. It also serves
+as an example of using the taskstats interface.
+
+Usage
+-----
+
+Compile the kernel with
+	CONFIG_TASK_DELAY_ACCT=y
+	CONFIG_TASKSTATS=y
+
+Enable the accounting at boot time by adding
+the following to the kernel boot options
+	delayacct
+
+and after the system has booted up, use a utility
+similar to  getdelays.c to access the delays
+seen by a given task or a task group (tgid).
+The utility also allows a given command to be
+executed and the corresponding delays to be
+seen.
+
+General format of the getdelays command
+
+getdelays [-t tgid] [-p pid] [-c cmd...]
+
+
+Get delays, since system boot, for pid 10
+# ./getdelays -p 10
+(output similar to next case)
+
+Get sum of delays, since system boot, for all pids with tgid 5
+# ./getdelays -t 5
+
+
+CPU	count	real total	virtual total	delay total
+	7876	92005750	100000000	24001500
+IO	count	delay total
+	0	0
+MEM	count	delay total
+	0	0
+
+Get delays seen in executing a given simple command
+# ./getdelays -c ls /
+
+bin   data1  data3  data5  dev  home  media  opt   root  srv        sys  usr
+boot  data2  data4  data6  etc  lib   mnt    proc  sbin  subdomain  tmp  var
+
+
+CPU	count	real total	virtual total	delay total
+	6	4000250		4000000		0
+IO	count	delay total
+	0	0
+MEM	count	delay total
+	0	0

Documentation/accounting/getdelays.c

@@ -0,0 +1,396 @@
+/* getdelays.c
+ *
+ * Utility to get per-pid and per-tgid delay accounting statistics
+ * Also illustrates usage of the taskstats interface
+ *
+ * Copyright (C) Shailabh Nagar, IBM Corp. 2005
+ * Copyright (C) Balbir Singh, IBM Corp. 2006
+ * Copyright (c) Jay Lan, SGI. 2006
+ *
+ */
+
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <stdlib.h>
+#include <errno.h>
+#include <unistd.h>
+#include <poll.h>
+#include <string.h>
+#include <fcntl.h>
+#include <sys/types.h>
+#include <sys/stat.h>
+#include <sys/socket.h>
+#include <sys/types.h>
+#include <signal.h>
+
+#include <linux/genetlink.h>
+#include <linux/taskstats.h>
+
+/*
+ * Generic macros for dealing with netlink sockets. Might be duplicated
+ * elsewhere. It is recommended that commercial grade applications use
+ * libnl or libnetlink and use the interfaces provided by the library
+ */
+#define GENLMSG_DATA(glh)	((void *)(NLMSG_DATA(glh) + GENL_HDRLEN))
+#define GENLMSG_PAYLOAD(glh)	(NLMSG_PAYLOAD(glh, 0) - GENL_HDRLEN)
+#define NLA_DATA(na)		((void *)((char*)(na) + NLA_HDRLEN))
+#define NLA_PAYLOAD(len)	(len - NLA_HDRLEN)
+
+#define err(code, fmt, arg...) do { printf(fmt, ##arg); exit(code); } while (0)
+int done = 0;
+int rcvbufsz=0;
+
+    char name[100];
+int dbg=0, print_delays=0;
+__u64 stime, utime;
+#define PRINTF(fmt, arg...) {			\
+	    if (dbg) {				\
+		printf(fmt, ##arg);		\
+	    }					\
+	}
+
+/* Maximum size of response requested or message sent */
+#define MAX_MSG_SIZE	256
+/* Maximum number of cpus expected to be specified in a cpumask */
+#define MAX_CPUS	32
+/* Maximum length of pathname to log file */
+#define MAX_FILENAME	256
+
+struct msgtemplate {
+	struct nlmsghdr n;
+	struct genlmsghdr g;
+	char buf[MAX_MSG_SIZE];
+};
+
+char cpumask[100+6*MAX_CPUS];
+
+/*
+ * Create a raw netlink socket and bind
+ */
+static int create_nl_socket(int protocol)
+{
+	int fd;
+	struct sockaddr_nl local;
+
+	fd = socket(AF_NETLINK, SOCK_RAW, protocol);
+	if (fd < 0)
+		return -1;
+
+	if (rcvbufsz)
+		if (setsockopt(fd, SOL_SOCKET, SO_RCVBUF,
+				&rcvbufsz, sizeof(rcvbufsz)) < 0) {
+			printf("Unable to set socket rcv buf size to %d\n",
+			       rcvbufsz);
+			return -1;
+		}
+
+	memset(&local, 0, sizeof(local));
+	local.nl_family = AF_NETLINK;
+
+	if (bind(fd, (struct sockaddr *) &local, sizeof(local)) < 0)
+		goto error;
+
+	return fd;
+error:
+	close(fd);
+	return -1;
+}
+
+
+int send_cmd(int sd, __u16 nlmsg_type, __u32 nlmsg_pid,
+	     __u8 genl_cmd, __u16 nla_type,
+	     void *nla_data, int nla_len)
+{
+	struct nlattr *na;
+	struct sockaddr_nl nladdr;
+	int r, buflen;
+	char *buf;
+
+	struct msgtemplate msg;
+
+	msg.n.nlmsg_len = NLMSG_LENGTH(GENL_HDRLEN);
+	msg.n.nlmsg_type = nlmsg_type;
+	msg.n.nlmsg_flags = NLM_F_REQUEST;
+	msg.n.nlmsg_seq = 0;
+	msg.n.nlmsg_pid = nlmsg_pid;
+	msg.g.cmd = genl_cmd;
+	msg.g.version = 0x1;
+	na = (struct nlattr *) GENLMSG_DATA(&msg);
+	na->nla_type = nla_type;
+	na->nla_len = nla_len + 1 + NLA_HDRLEN;
+	memcpy(NLA_DATA(na), nla_data, nla_len);
+	msg.n.nlmsg_len += NLMSG_ALIGN(na->nla_len);
+
+	buf = (char *) &msg;
+	buflen = msg.n.nlmsg_len ;
+	memset(&nladdr, 0, sizeof(nladdr));
+	nladdr.nl_family = AF_NETLINK;
+	while ((r = sendto(sd, buf, buflen, 0, (struct sockaddr *) &nladdr,
+			   sizeof(nladdr))) < buflen) {
+		if (r > 0) {
+			buf += r;
+			buflen -= r;
+		} else if (errno != EAGAIN)
+			return -1;
+	}
+	return 0;
+}
+
+
+/*
+ * Probe the controller in genetlink to find the family id
+ * for the TASKSTATS family
+ */
+int get_family_id(int sd)
+{
+	struct {
+		struct nlmsghdr n;
+		struct genlmsghdr g;
+		char buf[256];
+	} ans;
+
+	int id, rc;
+	struct nlattr *na;
+	int rep_len;
+
+	strcpy(name, TASKSTATS_GENL_NAME);
+	rc = send_cmd(sd, GENL_ID_CTRL, getpid(), CTRL_CMD_GETFAMILY,
+			CTRL_ATTR_FAMILY_NAME, (void *)name,
+			strlen(TASKSTATS_GENL_NAME)+1);
+
+	rep_len = recv(sd, &ans, sizeof(ans), 0);
+	if (ans.n.nlmsg_type == NLMSG_ERROR ||
+	    (rep_len < 0) || !NLMSG_OK((&ans.n), rep_len))
+		return 0;
+
+	na = (struct nlattr *) GENLMSG_DATA(&ans);
+	na = (struct nlattr *) ((char *) na + NLA_ALIGN(na->nla_len));
+	if (na->nla_type == CTRL_ATTR_FAMILY_ID) {
+		id = *(__u16 *) NLA_DATA(na);
+	}
+	return id;
+}
+
+void print_delayacct(struct taskstats *t)
+{
+	printf("\n\nCPU   %15s%15s%15s%15s\n"
+	       "      %15llu%15llu%15llu%15llu\n"
+	       "IO    %15s%15s\n"
+	       "      %15llu%15llu\n"
+	       "MEM   %15s%15s\n"
+	       "      %15llu%15llu\n\n",
+	       "count", "real total", "virtual total", "delay total",
+	       t->cpu_count, t->cpu_run_real_total, t->cpu_run_virtual_total,
+	       t->cpu_delay_total,
+	       "count", "delay total",
+	       t->blkio_count, t->blkio_delay_total,
+	       "count", "delay total", t->swapin_count, t->swapin_delay_total);
+}
+
+int main(int argc, char *argv[])
+{
+	int c, rc, rep_len, aggr_len, len2, cmd_type;
+	__u16 id;
+	__u32 mypid;
+
+	struct nlattr *na;
+	int nl_sd = -1;
+	int len = 0;
+	pid_t tid = 0;
+	pid_t rtid = 0;
+
+	int fd = 0;
+	int count = 0;
+	int write_file = 0;
+	int maskset = 0;
+	char logfile[128];
+	int loop = 0;
+
+	struct msgtemplate msg;
+
+	while (1) {
+		c = getopt(argc, argv, "dw:r:m:t:p:v:l");
+		if (c < 0)
+			break;
+
+		switch (c) {
+		case 'd':
+			printf("print delayacct stats ON\n");
+			print_delays = 1;
+			break;
+		case 'w':
+			strncpy(logfile, optarg, MAX_FILENAME);
+			printf("write to file %s\n", logfile);
+			write_file = 1;
+			break;
+		case 'r':
+			rcvbufsz = atoi(optarg);
+			printf("receive buf size %d\n", rcvbufsz);
+			if (rcvbufsz < 0)
+				err(1, "Invalid rcv buf size\n");
+			break;
+		case 'm':
+			strncpy(cpumask, optarg, sizeof(cpumask));
+			maskset = 1;
+			printf("cpumask %s maskset %d\n", cpumask, maskset);
+			break;
+		case 't':
+			tid = atoi(optarg);
+			if (!tid)
+				err(1, "Invalid tgid\n");
+			cmd_type = TASKSTATS_CMD_ATTR_TGID;
+			print_delays = 1;
+			break;
+		case 'p':
+			tid = atoi(optarg);
+			if (!tid)
+				err(1, "Invalid pid\n");
+			cmd_type = TASKSTATS_CMD_ATTR_PID;
+			print_delays = 1;
+			break;
+		case 'v':
+			printf("debug on\n");
+			dbg = 1;
+			break;
+		case 'l':
+			printf("listen forever\n");
+			loop = 1;
+			break;
+		default:
+			printf("Unknown option %d\n", c);
+			exit(-1);
+		}
+	}
+
+	if (write_file) {
+		fd = open(logfile, O_WRONLY | O_CREAT | O_TRUNC,
+			  S_IRUSR | S_IWUSR | S_IRGRP | S_IROTH);
+		if (fd == -1) {
+			perror("Cannot open output file\n");
+			exit(1);
+		}
+	}
+
+	if ((nl_sd = create_nl_socket(NETLINK_GENERIC)) < 0)
+		err(1, "error creating Netlink socket\n");
+
+
+	mypid = getpid();
+	id = get_family_id(nl_sd);
+	if (!id) {
+		printf("Error getting family id, errno %d", errno);
+		goto err;
+	}
+	PRINTF("family id %d\n", id);
+
+	if (maskset) {
+		rc = send_cmd(nl_sd, id, mypid, TASKSTATS_CMD_GET,
+			      TASKSTATS_CMD_ATTR_REGISTER_CPUMASK,
+			      &cpumask, sizeof(cpumask));
+		PRINTF("Sent register cpumask, retval %d\n", rc);
+		if (rc < 0) {
+			printf("error sending register cpumask\n");
+			goto err;
+		}
+	}
+
+	if (tid) {
+		rc = send_cmd(nl_sd, id, mypid, TASKSTATS_CMD_GET,
+			      cmd_type, &tid, sizeof(__u32));
+		PRINTF("Sent pid/tgid, retval %d\n", rc);
+		if (rc < 0) {
+			printf("error sending tid/tgid cmd\n");
+			goto done;
+		}
+	}
+
+	do {
+		int i;
+
+		rep_len = recv(nl_sd, &msg, sizeof(msg), 0);
+		PRINTF("received %d bytes\n", rep_len);
+
+		if (rep_len < 0) {
+			printf("nonfatal reply error: errno %d\n", errno);
+			continue;
+		}
+		if (msg.n.nlmsg_type == NLMSG_ERROR ||
+		    !NLMSG_OK((&msg.n), rep_len)) {
+			printf("fatal reply error,  errno %d\n", errno);
+			goto done;
+		}
+
+		PRINTF("nlmsghdr size=%d, nlmsg_len=%d, rep_len=%d\n",
+		       sizeof(struct nlmsghdr), msg.n.nlmsg_len, rep_len);
+
+
+		rep_len = GENLMSG_PAYLOAD(&msg.n);
+
+		na = (struct nlattr *) GENLMSG_DATA(&msg);
+		len = 0;
+		i = 0;
+		while (len < rep_len) {
+			len += NLA_ALIGN(na->nla_len);
+			switch (na->nla_type) {
+			case TASKSTATS_TYPE_AGGR_TGID:
+				/* Fall through */
+			case TASKSTATS_TYPE_AGGR_PID:
+				aggr_len = NLA_PAYLOAD(na->nla_len);
+				len2 = 0;
+				/* For nested attributes, na follows */
+				na = (struct nlattr *) NLA_DATA(na);
+				done = 0;
+				while (len2 < aggr_len) {
+					switch (na->nla_type) {
+					case TASKSTATS_TYPE_PID:
+						rtid = *(int *) NLA_DATA(na);
+						if (print_delays)
+							printf("PID\t%d\n", rtid);
+						break;
+					case TASKSTATS_TYPE_TGID:
+						rtid = *(int *) NLA_DATA(na);
+						if (print_delays)
+							printf("TGID\t%d\n", rtid);
+						break;
+					case TASKSTATS_TYPE_STATS:
+						count++;
+						if (print_delays)
+							print_delayacct((struct taskstats *) NLA_DATA(na));
+						if (fd) {
+							if (write(fd, NLA_DATA(na), na->nla_len) < 0) {
+								err(1,"write error\n");
+							}
+						}
+						if (!loop)
+							goto done;
+						break;
+					default:
+						printf("Unknown nested nla_type %d\n", na->nla_type);
+						break;
+					}
+					len2 += NLA_ALIGN(na->nla_len);
+					na = (struct nlattr *) ((char *) na + len2);
+				}
+				break;
+
+			default:
+				printf("Unknown nla_type %d\n", na->nla_type);
+				break;
+			}
+			na = (struct nlattr *) (GENLMSG_DATA(&msg) + len);
+		}
+	} while (loop);
+done:
+	if (maskset) {
+		rc = send_cmd(nl_sd, id, mypid, TASKSTATS_CMD_GET,
+			      TASKSTATS_CMD_ATTR_DEREGISTER_CPUMASK,
+			      &cpumask, sizeof(cpumask));
+		printf("Sent deregister mask, retval %d\n", rc);
+		if (rc < 0)
+			err(rc, "error sending deregister cpumask\n");
+	}
+err:
+	close(nl_sd);
+	if (fd)
+		close(fd);
+	return 0;
+}

Documentation/accounting/taskstats.txt

@@ -0,0 +1,181 @@
+Per-task statistics interface
+-----------------------------
+
+
+Taskstats is a netlink-based interface for sending per-task and
+per-process statistics from the kernel to userspace.
+
+Taskstats was designed for the following benefits:
+
+- efficiently provide statistics during lifetime of a task and on its exit
+- unified interface for multiple accounting subsystems
+- extensibility for use by future accounting patches
+
+Terminology
+-----------
+
+"pid", "tid" and "task" are used interchangeably and refer to the standard
+Linux task defined by struct task_struct.  per-pid stats are the same as
+per-task stats.
+
+"tgid", "process" and "thread group" are used interchangeably and refer to the
+tasks that share an mm_struct i.e. the traditional Unix process. Despite the
+use of tgid, there is no special treatment for the task that is thread group
+leader - a process is deemed alive as long as it has any task belonging to it.
+
+Usage
+-----
+
+To get statistics during a task's lifetime, userspace opens a unicast netlink
+socket (NETLINK_GENERIC family) and sends commands specifying a pid or a tgid.
+The response contains statistics for a task (if pid is specified) or the sum of
+statistics for all tasks of the process (if tgid is specified).
+
+To obtain statistics for tasks which are exiting, the userspace listener
+sends a register command and specifies a cpumask. Whenever a task exits on
+one of the cpus in the cpumask, its per-pid statistics are sent to the
+registered listener. Using cpumasks allows the data received by one listener
+to be limited and assists in flow control over the netlink interface and is
+explained in more detail below.
+
+If the exiting task is the last thread exiting its thread group,
+an additional record containing the per-tgid stats is also sent to userspace.
+The latter contains the sum of per-pid stats for all threads in the thread
+group, both past and present.
+
+getdelays.c is a simple utility demonstrating usage of the taskstats interface
+for reporting delay accounting statistics. Users can register cpumasks,
+send commands and process responses, listen for per-tid/tgid exit data,
+write the data received to a file and do basic flow control by increasing
+receive buffer sizes.
+
+Interface
+---------
+
+The user-kernel interface is encapsulated in include/linux/taskstats.h
+
+To avoid this documentation becoming obsolete as the interface evolves, only
+an outline of the current version is given. taskstats.h always overrides the
+description here.
+
+struct taskstats is the common accounting structure for both per-pid and
+per-tgid data. It is versioned and can be extended by each accounting subsystem
+that is added to the kernel. The fields and their semantics are defined in the
+taskstats.h file.
+
+The data exchanged between user and kernel space is a netlink message belonging
+to the NETLINK_GENERIC family and using the netlink attributes interface.
+The messages are in the format
+
+    +----------+- - -+-------------+-------------------+
+    | nlmsghdr | Pad |  genlmsghdr | taskstats payload |
+    +----------+- - -+-------------+-------------------+
+
+
+The taskstats payload is one of the following three kinds:
+
+1. Commands: Sent from user to kernel. Commands to get data on
+a pid/tgid consist of one attribute, of type TASKSTATS_CMD_ATTR_PID/TGID,
+containing a u32 pid or tgid in the attribute payload. The pid/tgid denotes
+the task/process for which userspace wants statistics.
+
+Commands to register/deregister interest in exit data from a set of cpus
+consist of one attribute, of type
+TASKSTATS_CMD_ATTR_REGISTER/DEREGISTER_CPUMASK and contain a cpumask in the
+attribute payload. The cpumask is specified as an ascii string of
+comma-separated cpu ranges e.g. to listen to exit data from cpus 1,2,3,5,7,8
+the cpumask would be "1-3,5,7-8". If userspace forgets to deregister interest
+in cpus before closing the listening socket, the kernel cleans up its interest
+set over time. However, for the sake of efficiency, an explicit deregistration
+is advisable.
+
+2. Response for a command: sent from the kernel in response to a userspace
+command. The payload is a series of three attributes of type:
+
+a) TASKSTATS_TYPE_AGGR_PID/TGID : attribute containing no payload but indicates
+a pid/tgid will be followed by some stats.
+
+b) TASKSTATS_TYPE_PID/TGID: attribute whose payload is the pid/tgid whose stats
+is being returned.
+
+c) TASKSTATS_TYPE_STATS: attribute with a struct taskstsats as payload. The
+same structure is used for both per-pid and per-tgid stats.
+
+3. New message sent by kernel whenever a task exits. The payload consists of a
+   series of attributes of the following type:
+
+a) TASKSTATS_TYPE_AGGR_PID: indicates next two attributes will be pid+stats
+b) TASKSTATS_TYPE_PID: contains exiting task's pid
+c) TASKSTATS_TYPE_STATS: contains the exiting task's per-pid stats
+d) TASKSTATS_TYPE_AGGR_TGID: indicates next two attributes will be tgid+stats
+e) TASKSTATS_TYPE_TGID: contains tgid of process to which task belongs
+f) TASKSTATS_TYPE_STATS: contains the per-tgid stats for exiting task's process
+
+
+per-tgid stats
+--------------
+
+Taskstats provides per-process stats, in addition to per-task stats, since
+resource management is often done at a process granularity and aggregating task
+stats in userspace alone is inefficient and potentially inaccurate (due to lack
+of atomicity).
+
+However, maintaining per-process, in addition to per-task stats, within the
+kernel has space and time overheads. To address this, the taskstats code
+accumalates each exiting task's statistics into a process-wide data structure.
+When the last task of a process exits, the process level data accumalated also
+gets sent to userspace (along with the per-task data).
+
+When a user queries to get per-tgid data, the sum of all other live threads in
+the group is added up and added to the accumalated total for previously exited
+threads of the same thread group.
+
+Extending taskstats
+-------------------
+
+There are two ways to extend the taskstats interface to export more
+per-task/process stats as patches to collect them get added to the kernel
+in future:
+
+1. Adding more fields to the end of the existing struct taskstats. Backward
+   compatibility is ensured by the version number within the
+   structure. Userspace will use only the fields of the struct that correspond
+   to the version its using.
+
+2. Defining separate statistic structs and using the netlink attributes
+   interface to return them. Since userspace processes each netlink attribute
+   independently, it can always ignore attributes whose type it does not
+   understand (because it is using an older version of the interface).
+
+
+Choosing between 1. and 2. is a matter of trading off flexibility and
+overhead. If only a few fields need to be added, then 1. is the preferable
+path since the kernel and userspace don't need to incur the overhead of
+processing new netlink attributes. But if the new fields expand the existing
+struct too much, requiring disparate userspace accounting utilities to
+unnecessarily receive large structures whose fields are of no interest, then
+extending the attributes structure would be worthwhile.
+
+Flow control for taskstats
+--------------------------
+
+When the rate of task exits becomes large, a listener may not be able to keep
+up with the kernel's rate of sending per-tid/tgid exit data leading to data
+loss. This possibility gets compounded when the taskstats structure gets
+extended and the number of cpus grows large.
+
+To avoid losing statistics, userspace should do one or more of the following:
+
+- increase the receive buffer sizes for the netlink sockets opened by
+listeners to receive exit data.
+
+- create more listeners and reduce the number of cpus being listened to by
+each listener. In the extreme case, there could be one listener for each cpu.
+Users may also consider setting the cpu affinity of the listener to the subset
+of cpus to which it listens, especially if they are listening to just one cpu.
+
+Despite these measures, if the userspace receives ENOBUFS error messages
+indicated overflow of receive buffers, it should take measures to handle the
+loss of data.
+
+----

Documentation/arm/IXP4xx

@@ -85,7 +85,7 @@ IXP4xx provides two methods of accessing PCI memory space:
 2) If > 64MB of memory space is required, the IXP4xx can be 
    configured to use indirect registers to access PCI This allows 
    for up to 128MB (0x48000000 to 0x4fffffff) of memory on the bus. 
-   The disadvantadge of this is that every PCI access requires 
+   The disadvantage of this is that every PCI access requires 
    three local register accesses plus a spinlock, but in some 
    cases the performance hit is acceptable. In addition, you cannot 
    mmap() PCI devices in this case due to the indirect nature

Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/Overview.txt

@@ -7,11 +7,13 @@ Introduction
 ------------
 
   The Samsung S3C24XX range of ARM9 System-on-Chip CPUs are supported
-  by the 's3c2410' architecture of ARM Linux. Currently the S3C2410 and
-  the S3C2440 are supported CPUs.
+  by the 's3c2410' architecture of ARM Linux. Currently the S3C2410,
+  S3C2440 and S3C2442 devices are supported.
 
   Support for the S3C2400 series is in progress.
 
+  Support for the S3C2412 and S3C2413 CPUs is being merged.
+
 
 Configuration
 -------------
@@ -43,9 +45,18 @@ Machines
 
     Samsung's own development board, geared for PDA work.
 
+  Samsung/Aiji SMDK2412
+
+    The S3C2412 version of the SMDK2440.
+
+  Samsung/Aiji SMDK2413
+
+    The S3C2412 version of the SMDK2440.
+
   Samsung/Meritech SMDK2440
 
-    The S3C2440 compatible version of the SMDK2440
+    The S3C2440 compatible version of the SMDK2440, which has the
+    option of an S3C2440 or S3C2442 CPU module.
 
   Thorcom VR1000
 
@@ -211,24 +222,6 @@ Port Contributors
   Lucas Correia Villa Real (S3C2400 port)
 
 
-Document Changes
-----------------
-
-  05 Sep 2004 - BJD - Added Document Changes section
-  05 Sep 2004 - BJD - Added Klaus Fetscher to list of contributors
-  25 Oct 2004 - BJD - Added Dimitry Andric to list of contributors
-  25 Oct 2004 - BJD - Updated the MTD from the 2.6.9 merge
-  21 Jan 2005 - BJD - Added rx3715, added Shannon to contributors
-  10 Feb 2005 - BJD - Added Guillaume Gourat to contributors
-  02 Mar 2005 - BJD - Added SMDK2440 to list of machines
-  06 Mar 2005 - BJD - Added Christer Weinigel
-  08 Mar 2005 - BJD - Added LCVR to list of people, updated introduction
-  08 Mar 2005 - BJD - Added section on adding machines
-  09 Sep 2005 - BJD - Added section on platform data
-  11 Feb 2006 - BJD - Added I2C, RTC and Watchdog sections
-  11 Feb 2006 - BJD - Added Osiris machine, and S3C2400 information
-
-
 Document Author
 ---------------
 

Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/S3C2412.txt

@@ -0,0 +1,120 @@
+		S3C2412 ARM Linux Overview
+		==========================
+
+Introduction
+------------
+
+  The S3C2412 is part of the S3C24XX range of ARM9 System-on-Chip CPUs
+  from Samsung. This part has an ARM926-EJS core, capable of running up
+  to 266MHz (see data-sheet for more information)
+
+
+Clock
+-----
+
+  The core clock code provides a set of clocks to the drivers, and allows
+  for source selection and a number of other features.
+
+
+Power
+-----
+
+  No support for suspend/resume to RAM in the current system.
+
+
+DMA
+---
+
+  No current support for DMA.
+
+
+GPIO
+----
+
+  There is support for setting the GPIO to input/output/special function
+  and reading or writing to them.
+
+
+UART
+----
+
+  The UART hardware is similar to the S3C2440, and is supported by the
+  s3c2410 driver in the drivers/serial directory.
+
+
+NAND
+----
+
+  The NAND hardware is similar to the S3C2440, and is supported by the
+  s3c2410 driver in the drivers/mtd/nand directory.
+
+
+USB Host
+--------
+
+  The USB hardware is similar to the S3C2410, with extended clock source
+  control. The OHCI portion is supported by the ohci-s3c2410 driver, and
+  the clock control selection is supported by the core clock code.
+
+
+USB Device
+----------
+
+  No current support in the kernel
+
+
+IRQs
+----
+
+  All the standard, and external interrupt sources are supported. The
+  extra sub-sources are not yet supported.
+
+
+RTC
+---
+
+  The RTC hardware is similar to the S3C2410, and is supported by the
+  s3c2410-rtc driver.
+
+
+Watchdog
+--------
+
+  The watchdog harware is the same as the S3C2410, and is supported by
+  the s3c2410_wdt driver.
+
+
+MMC/SD/SDIO
+-----------
+
+  No current support for the MMC/SD/SDIO block.
+
+IIC
+---
+
+  The IIC hardware is the same as the S3C2410, and is supported by the
+  i2c-s3c24xx driver.
+
+
+IIS
+---
+
+  No current support for the IIS interface.
+
+
+SPI
+---
+
+  No current support for the SPI interfaces.
+
+
+ATA
+---
+
+  No current support for the on-board ATA block.
+
+
+Document Author
+---------------
+
+Ben Dooks, (c) 2006 Simtec Electronics

Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/S3C2413.txt

@@ -0,0 +1,21 @@
+		S3C2413 ARM Linux Overview
+		==========================
+
+Introduction
+------------
+
+  The S3C2413 is an extended version of the S3C2412, with an camera
+  interface and mobile DDR memory support. See the S3C2412 support
+  documentation for more information.
+
+
+Camera Interface
+---------------
+
+  This block is currently not supported.
+
+
+Document Author
+---------------
+
+Ben Dooks, (c) 2006 Simtec Electronics

Documentation/arm/Sharp-LH/ADC-LH7-Touchscreen

@@ -0,0 +1,61 @@
+README on the ADC/Touchscreen Controller
+========================================
+
+The LH79524 and LH7A404 include a built-in Analog to Digital
+controller (ADC) that is used to process input from a touchscreen.
+The driver only implements a four-wire touch panel protocol.
+
+The touchscreen driver is maintenance free except for the pen-down or
+touch threshold.  Some resistive displays and board combinations may
+require tuning of this threshold.  The driver exposes some of it's
+internal state in the sys filesystem.  If the kernel is configured
+with it, CONFIG_SYSFS, and sysfs is mounted at /sys, there will be a
+directory
+
+  /sys/devices/platform/adc-lh7.0
+
+containing these files.
+
+  -r--r--r--    1 root     root         4096 Jan  1 00:00 samples
+  -rw-r--r--    1 root     root         4096 Jan  1 00:00 threshold
+  -r--r--r--    1 root     root         4096 Jan  1 00:00 threshold_range
+
+The threshold is the current touch threshold.  It defaults to 750 on
+most targets.
+
+  # cat threshold
+ 750
+
+The threshold_range contains the range of valid values for the
+threshold.  Values outside of this range will be silently ignored.
+
+  # cat threshold_range
+  0 1023
+
+To change the threshold, write a value to the threshold file.
+
+  # echo 500 > threshold
+  # cat threshold
+  500
+
+The samples file contains the most recently sampled values from the
+ADC.  There are 12.  Below are typical of the last sampled values when
+the pen has been released.  The first two and last two samples are for
+detecting whether or not the pen is down.  The third through sixth are
+X coordinate samples.  The seventh through tenth are Y coordinate
+samples.
+
+  # cat samples
+  1023 1023 0 0 0 0 530 529 530 529 1023 1023
+
+To determine a reasonable threshold, press on the touch panel with an
+appropriate stylus and read the values from samples.
+
+  # cat samples
+  1023 676 92 103 101 102 855 919 922 922 1023 679
+
+The first and eleventh samples are discarded.  Thus, the important
+values are the second and twelfth which are used to determine if the
+pen is down.  When both are below the threshold, the driver registers
+that the pen is down.  When either is above the threshold, it
+registers then pen is up.

Documentation/arm/Sharp-LH/LCDPanels

@@ -0,0 +1,59 @@
+README on the LCD Panels
+========================
+
+Configuration options for several LCD panels, available from Logic PD,
+are included in the kernel source.  This README will help you
+understand the configuration data and give you some guidance for
+adding support for other panels if you wish.
+
+
+lcd-panels.h
+------------
+
+There is no way, at present, to detect which panel is attached to the
+system at runtime.  Thus the kernel configuration is static.  The file
+arch/arm/mach-ld7a40x/lcd-panels.h (or similar) defines all of the
+panel specific parameters.
+
+It should be possible for this data to be shared among several device
+families.  The current layout may be insufficiently general, but it is
+amenable to improvement.
+
+
+PIXEL_CLOCK
+-----------
+
+The panel data sheets will give a range of acceptable pixel clocks.
+The fundamental LCDCLK input frequency is divided down by a PCD
+constant in field '.tim2'.  It may happen that it is impossible to set
+the pixel clock within this range.  A clock which is too slow will
+tend to flicker.  For the highest quality image, set the clock as high
+as possible.
+
+
+MARGINS
+-------
+
+These values may be difficult to glean from the panel data sheet.  In
+the case of the Sharp panels, the upper margin is explicitly called
+out as a specific number of lines from the top of the frame.  The
+other values may not matter as much as the panels tend to
+automatically center the image.
+
+
+Sync Sense
+----------
+
+The sense of the hsync and vsync pulses may be called out in the data
+sheet.  On one panel, the sense of these pulses determine the height
+of the visible region on the panel.  Most of the Sharp panels use
+negative sense sync pulses set by the TIM2_IHS and TIM2_IVS bits in
+'.tim2'.
+
+
+Pel Layout
+----------
+
+The Sharp color TFT panels are all configured for 16 bit direct color
+modes.  The amba-lcd driver sets the pel mode to 565 for 5 bits of
+each red and blue and 6 bits of green.

Documentation/atomic_ops.txt

@@ -157,13 +157,13 @@ For example, smp_mb__before_atomic_dec() can be used like so:
 	smp_mb__before_atomic_dec();
 	atomic_dec(&obj->ref_count);
 
-It makes sure that all memory operations preceeding the atomic_dec()
+It makes sure that all memory operations preceding the atomic_dec()
 call are strongly ordered with respect to the atomic counter
-operation.  In the above example, it guarentees that the assignment of
+operation.  In the above example, it guarantees that the assignment of
 "1" to obj->dead will be globally visible to other cpus before the
 atomic counter decrement.
 
-Without the explicitl smp_mb__before_atomic_dec() call, the
+Without the explicit smp_mb__before_atomic_dec() call, the
 implementation could legally allow the atomic counter update visible
 to other cpus before the "obj->dead = 1;" assignment.
 
@@ -173,11 +173,11 @@ ordering with respect to memory operations after an atomic_dec() call
 (smp_mb__{before,after}_atomic_inc()).
 
 A missing memory barrier in the cases where they are required by the
-atomic_t implementation above can have disasterous results.  Here is
-an example, which follows a pattern occuring frequently in the Linux
+atomic_t implementation above can have disastrous results.  Here is
+an example, which follows a pattern occurring frequently in the Linux
 kernel.  It is the use of atomic counters to implement reference
 counting, and it works such that once the counter falls to zero it can
-be guarenteed that no other entity can be accessing the object:
+be guaranteed that no other entity can be accessing the object:
 
 static void obj_list_add(struct obj *obj)
 {
@@ -291,9 +291,9 @@ to the size of an "unsigned long" C data type, and are least of that
 size.  The endianness of the bits within each "unsigned long" are the
 native endianness of the cpu.
 
-	void set_bit(unsigned long nr, volatils unsigned long *addr);
-	void clear_bit(unsigned long nr, volatils unsigned long *addr);
-	void change_bit(unsigned long nr, volatils unsigned long *addr);
+	void set_bit(unsigned long nr, volatile unsigned long *addr);
+	void clear_bit(unsigned long nr, volatile unsigned long *addr);
+	void change_bit(unsigned long nr, volatile unsigned long *addr);
 
 These routines set, clear, and change, respectively, the bit number
 indicated by "nr" on the bit mask pointed to by "ADDR".
@@ -301,9 +301,9 @@ indicated by "nr" on the bit mask pointed to by "ADDR".
 They must execute atomically, yet there are no implicit memory barrier
 semantics required of these interfaces.
 
-	int test_and_set_bit(unsigned long nr, volatils unsigned long *addr);
-	int test_and_clear_bit(unsigned long nr, volatils unsigned long *addr);
-	int test_and_change_bit(unsigned long nr, volatils unsigned long *addr);
+	int test_and_set_bit(unsigned long nr, volatile unsigned long *addr);
+	int test_and_clear_bit(unsigned long nr, volatile unsigned long *addr);
+	int test_and_change_bit(unsigned long nr, volatile unsigned long *addr);
 
 Like the above, except that these routines return a boolean which
 indicates whether the changed bit was set _BEFORE_ the atomic bit
@@ -335,7 +335,7 @@ subsequent memory operation is made visible.  For example:
 		/* ... */;
 	obj->killed = 1;
 
-The implementation of test_and_set_bit() must guarentee that
+The implementation of test_and_set_bit() must guarantee that
 "obj->dead = 1;" is visible to cpus before the atomic memory operation
 done by test_and_set_bit() becomes visible.  Likewise, the atomic
 memory operation done by test_and_set_bit() must become visible before
@@ -474,7 +474,7 @@ Now, as far as memory barriers go, as long as spin_lock()
 strictly orders all subsequent memory operations (including
 the cas()) with respect to itself, things will be fine.
 
-Said another way, _atomic_dec_and_lock() must guarentee that
+Said another way, _atomic_dec_and_lock() must guarantee that
 a counter dropping to zero is never made visible before the
 spinlock being acquired.
 

Documentation/console/console.txt

@@ -0,0 +1,144 @@
+Console Drivers
+===============
+
+The linux kernel has 2 general types of console drivers.  The first type is
+assigned by the kernel to all the virtual consoles during the boot process.
+This type will be called 'system driver', and only one system driver is allowed
+to exist. The system driver is persistent and it can never be unloaded, though
+it may become inactive.
+
+The second type has to be explicitly loaded and unloaded. This will be called
+'modular driver' by this document. Multiple modular drivers can coexist at
+any time with each driver sharing the console with other drivers including
+the system driver. However, modular drivers cannot take over the console
+that is currently occupied by another modular driver. (Exception: Drivers that
+call take_over_console() will succeed in the takeover regardless of the type
+of driver occupying the consoles.) They can only take over the console that is
+occupied by the system driver. In the same token, if the modular driver is
+released by the console, the system driver will take over.
+
+Modular drivers, from the programmer's point of view, has to call:
+
+	 take_over_console() - load and bind driver to console layer
+	 give_up_console() - unbind and unload driver
+
+In newer kernels, the following are also available:
+
+	 register_con_driver()
+	 unregister_con_driver()
+
+If sysfs is enabled, the contents of /sys/class/vtconsole can be
+examined. This shows the console backends currently registered by the
+system which are named vtcon<n> where <n> is an integer fro 0 to 15. Thus:
+
+       ls /sys/class/vtconsole
+       .  ..  vtcon0  vtcon1
+
+Each directory in /sys/class/vtconsole has 3 files:
+
+     ls /sys/class/vtconsole/vtcon0
+     .  ..  bind  name  uevent
+
+What do these files signify?
+
+     1. bind - this is a read/write file. It shows the status of the driver if
+        read, or acts to bind or unbind the driver to the virtual consoles
+        when written to. The possible values are:
+
+	0 - means the driver is not bound and if echo'ed, commands the driver
+	    to unbind
+
+        1 - means the driver is bound and if echo'ed, commands the driver to
+	    bind
+
+     2. name - read-only file. Shows the name of the driver in this format:
+
+	cat /sys/class/vtconsole/vtcon0/name
+	(S) VGA+
+
+	    '(S)' stands for a (S)ystem driver, ie, it cannot be directly
+	    commanded to bind or unbind
+
+	    'VGA+' is the name of the driver
+
+	cat /sys/class/vtconsole/vtcon1/name
+	(M) frame buffer device
+
+	    In this case, '(M)' stands for a (M)odular driver, one that can be
+	    directly commanded to bind or unbind.
+
+     3. uevent - ignore this file
+
+When unbinding, the modular driver is detached first, and then the system
+driver takes over the consoles vacated by the driver. Binding, on the other
+hand, will bind the driver to the consoles that are currently occupied by a
+system driver.
+
+NOTE1: Binding and binding must be selected in Kconfig. It's under:
+
+Device Drivers -> Character devices -> Support for binding and unbinding
+console drivers
+
+NOTE2: If any of the virtual consoles are in KD_GRAPHICS mode, then binding or
+unbinding will not succeed. An example of an application that sets the console
+to KD_GRAPHICS is X.
+
+How useful is this feature? This is very useful for console driver
+developers. By unbinding the driver from the console layer, one can unload the
+driver, make changes, recompile, reload and rebind the driver without any need
+for rebooting the kernel. For regular users who may want to switch from
+framebuffer console to VGA console and vice versa, this feature also makes
+this possible. (NOTE NOTE NOTE: Please read fbcon.txt under Documentation/fb
+for more details).
+
+Notes for developers:
+=====================
+
+take_over_console() is now broken up into:
+
+     register_con_driver()
+     bind_con_driver() - private function
+
+give_up_console() is a wrapper to unregister_con_driver(), and a driver must
+be fully unbound for this call to succeed. con_is_bound() will check if the
+driver is bound or not.
+
+Guidelines for console driver writers:
+=====================================
+
+In order for binding to and unbinding from the console to properly work,
+console drivers must follow these guidelines:
+
+1. All drivers, except system drivers, must call either register_con_driver()
+   or take_over_console(). register_con_driver() will just add the driver to
+   the console's internal list. It won't take over the
+   console. take_over_console(), as it name implies, will also take over (or
+   bind to) the console.
+
+2. All resources allocated during con->con_init() must be released in
+   con->con_deinit().
+
+3. All resources allocated in con->con_startup() must be released when the
+   driver, which was previously bound, becomes unbound.  The console layer
+   does not have a complementary call to con->con_startup() so it's up to the
+   driver to check when it's legal to release these resources. Calling
+   con_is_bound() in con->con_deinit() will help.  If the call returned
+   false(), then it's safe to release the resources.  This balance has to be
+   ensured because con->con_startup() can be called again when a request to
+   rebind the driver to the console arrives.
+
+4. Upon exit of the driver, ensure that the driver is totally unbound. If the
+   condition is satisfied, then the driver must call unregister_con_driver()
+   or give_up_console().
+
+5. unregister_con_driver() can also be called on conditions which make it
+   impossible for the driver to service console requests.  This can happen
+   with the framebuffer console that suddenly lost all of its drivers.
+
+The current crop of console drivers should still work correctly, but binding
+and unbinding them may cause problems. With minimal fixes, these drivers can
+be made to work correctly.
+
+==========================
+Antonino Daplas <adaplas@pol.net>
+

Documentation/devices.txt

@@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
 
 	     Maintained by Torben Mathiasen <device@lanana.org>
 
-		      Last revised: 25 January 2005
+		      Last revised: 15 May 2006
 
 This list is the Linux Device List, the official registry of allocated
 device numbers and /dev directory nodes for the Linux operating
@@ -94,7 +94,6 @@ Your cooperation is appreciated.
 		  9 = /dev/urandom	Faster, less secure random number gen.
 		 10 = /dev/aio		Asyncronous I/O notification interface
 		 11 = /dev/kmsg		Writes to this come out as printk's
-		 12 = /dev/oldmem	Access to crash dump from kexec kernel
   1 block	RAM disk
 		  0 = /dev/ram0		First RAM disk
 		  1 = /dev/ram1		Second RAM disk
@@ -262,13 +261,13 @@ Your cooperation is appreciated.
 		NOTE: These devices permit both read and write access.
 
   7 block	Loopback devices
-		  0 = /dev/loop0	First loopback device
-		  1 = /dev/loop1	Second loopback device
+		  0 = /dev/loop0	First loop device
+		  1 = /dev/loop1	Second loop device
 		    ...
 
-		The loopback devices are used to mount filesystems not
+		The loop devices are used to mount filesystems not
 		associated with block devices.	The binding to the
-		loopback devices is handled by mount(8) or losetup(8).
+		loop devices is handled by mount(8) or losetup(8).
 
   8 block	SCSI disk devices (0-15)
 		  0 = /dev/sda		First SCSI disk whole disk
@@ -943,7 +942,7 @@ Your cooperation is appreciated.
 		240 = /dev/ftlp		FTL on 16th Memory Technology Device 
 
 		Partitions are handled in the same way as for IDE
-		disks (see major number 3) expect that the partition
+		disks (see major number 3) except that the partition
 		limit is 15 rather than 63 per disk (same as SCSI.)
 
  45 char	isdn4linux ISDN BRI driver
@@ -1168,7 +1167,7 @@ Your cooperation is appreciated.
 		The filename of the encrypted container and the passwords
 		are sent via ioctls (using the sdmount tool) to the master
 		node which then activates them via one of the
-		/dev/scramdisk/x nodes for loopback mounting (all handled
+		/dev/scramdisk/x nodes for loop mounting (all handled
 		through the sdmount tool).
 
 		Requested by: andy@scramdisklinux.org
@@ -2538,18 +2537,32 @@ Your cooperation is appreciated.
 		  0 = /dev/usb/lp0	First USB printer
 		    ...
 		 15 = /dev/usb/lp15	16th USB printer
-		 16 = /dev/usb/mouse0	First USB mouse
-		    ...
-		 31 = /dev/usb/mouse15	16th USB mouse
-		 32 = /dev/usb/ez0	First USB firmware loader
-		    ...
-		 47 = /dev/usb/ez15	16th USB firmware loader
 		 48 = /dev/usb/scanner0	First USB scanner
 		    ...
 		 63 = /dev/usb/scanner15 16th USB scanner
 		 64 = /dev/usb/rio500	Diamond Rio 500
 		 65 = /dev/usb/usblcd	USBLCD Interface (info@usblcd.de)
 		 66 = /dev/usb/cpad0	Synaptics cPad (mouse/LCD)
+		 96 = /dev/usb/hiddev0	1st USB HID device
+		    ...
+		111 = /dev/usb/hiddev15	16th USB HID device
+		112 = /dev/usb/auer0	1st auerswald ISDN device
+		    ...
+		127 = /dev/usb/auer15	16th auerswald ISDN device
+		128 = /dev/usb/brlvgr0	First Braille Voyager device
+		    ...
+		131 = /dev/usb/brlvgr3	Fourth Braille Voyager device
+		132 = /dev/usb/idmouse	ID Mouse (fingerprint scanner) device
+		133 = /dev/usb/sisusbvga1	First SiSUSB VGA device
+		    ...
+		140 = /dev/usb/sisusbvga8	Eigth SISUSB VGA device
+		144 = /dev/usb/lcd	USB LCD device
+		160 = /dev/usb/legousbtower0	1st USB Legotower device
+		    ...
+		175 = /dev/usb/legousbtower15	16th USB Legotower device
+		240 = /dev/usb/dabusb0	First daubusb device
+		    ...
+		243 = /dev/usb/dabusb3	Fourth dabusb device
 
 180 block	USB block devices
 		0 = /dev/uba		First USB block device
@@ -2710,6 +2723,17 @@ Your cooperation is appreciated.
 		  1 = /dev/cpu/1/msr		MSRs on CPU 1
 		    ...
 
+202 block	Xen Virtual Block Device
+		  0 = /dev/xvda       First Xen VBD whole disk
+		  16 = /dev/xvdb      Second Xen VBD whole disk
+		  32 = /dev/xvdc      Third Xen VBD whole disk
+		    ...
+		  240 = /dev/xvdp     Sixteenth Xen VBD whole disk
+
+                Partitions are handled in the same way as for IDE
+                disks (see major number 3) except that the limit on
+                partitions is 15.
+
 203 char	CPU CPUID information
 		  0 = /dev/cpu/0/cpuid		CPUID on CPU 0
 		  1 = /dev/cpu/1/cpuid		CPUID on CPU 1
@@ -2747,11 +2771,27 @@ Your cooperation is appreciated.
 		 46 = /dev/ttyCPM0		PPC CPM (SCC or SMC) - port 0
 		    ...
 		 47 = /dev/ttyCPM5		PPC CPM (SCC or SMC) - port 5
-		 50 = /dev/ttyIOC40		Altix serial card
+		 50 = /dev/ttyIOC0		Altix serial card
 		    ...
-		 81 = /dev/ttyIOC431		Altix serial card
-		 82 = /dev/ttyVR0               NEC VR4100 series SIU
-		 83 = /dev/ttyVR1               NEC VR4100 series DSIU
+		 81 = /dev/ttyIOC31		Altix serial card
+		 82 = /dev/ttyVR0		NEC VR4100 series SIU
+		 83 = /dev/ttyVR1		NEC VR4100 series DSIU
+		 84 = /dev/ttyIOC84		Altix ioc4 serial card
+		    ...
+		 115 = /dev/ttyIOC115		Altix ioc4 serial card
+		 116 = /dev/ttySIOC0		Altix ioc3 serial card
+		    ...
+		 147 = /dev/ttySIOC31		Altix ioc3 serial card
+		 148 = /dev/ttyPSC0		PPC PSC - port 0
+		    ...
+		 153 = /dev/ttyPSC5		PPC PSC - port 5
+		 154 = /dev/ttyAT0		ATMEL serial port 0
+		    ...
+		 169 = /dev/ttyAT15		ATMEL serial port 15
+		 170 = /dev/ttyNX0		Hilscher netX serial port 0
+		    ...
+		 185 = /dev/ttyNX15		Hilscher netX serial port 15
+		 186 = /dev/ttyJ0		JTAG1 DCC protocol based serial port emulation
 
 205 char	Low-density serial ports (alternate device)
 		  0 = /dev/culu0		Callout device for ttyLU0
@@ -2786,8 +2826,8 @@ Your cooperation is appreciated.
 		 50 = /dev/cuioc40		Callout device for ttyIOC40
 		    ...
 		 81 = /dev/cuioc431		Callout device for ttyIOC431
-		 82 = /dev/cuvr0                Callout device for ttyVR0
-		 83 = /dev/cuvr1                Callout device for ttyVR1
+		 82 = /dev/cuvr0		Callout device for ttyVR0
+		 83 = /dev/cuvr1		Callout device for ttyVR1
 
 
 206 char	OnStream SC-x0 tape devices
@@ -2897,7 +2937,6 @@ Your cooperation is appreciated.
 		    ...
 		196 = /dev/dvb/adapter3/video0    first video decoder of fourth card
 
-
 216 char	Bluetooth RFCOMM TTY devices
 		  0 = /dev/rfcomm0		First Bluetooth RFCOMM TTY device
 		  1 = /dev/rfcomm1		Second Bluetooth RFCOMM TTY device
@@ -3002,12 +3041,43 @@ Your cooperation is appreciated.
 		ioctl()'s can be used to rewind the tape regardless of
 		the device used to access it.
 
-231 char	InfiniBand MAD
+231 char	InfiniBand
 		0 = /dev/infiniband/umad0
 		1 = /dev/infiniband/umad1
-		 ...
+		  ...
+		63 = /dev/infiniband/umad63    63rd InfiniBandMad device
+		64 = /dev/infiniband/issm0     First InfiniBand IsSM device
+		65 = /dev/infiniband/issm1     Second InfiniBand IsSM device
+		  ...
+		127 = /dev/infiniband/issm63    63rd InfiniBand IsSM device
+		128 = /dev/infiniband/uverbs0   First InfiniBand verbs device
+		129 = /dev/infiniband/uverbs1   Second InfiniBand verbs device
+		  ...
+		159 = /dev/infiniband/uverbs31  31st InfiniBand verbs device
 
-232-239		UNASSIGNED
+232 char	Biometric Devices
+		0 = /dev/biometric/sensor0/fingerprint	first fingerprint sensor on first device
+		1 = /dev/biometric/sensor0/iris		first iris sensor on first device
+		2 = /dev/biometric/sensor0/retina	first retina sensor on first device
+		3 = /dev/biometric/sensor0/voiceprint	first voiceprint sensor on first device
+		4 = /dev/biometric/sensor0/facial	first facial sensor on first device
+		5 = /dev/biometric/sensor0/hand		first hand sensor on first device
+		  ...
+		10 = /dev/biometric/sensor1/fingerprint	first fingerprint sensor on second device
+		  ...
+		20 = /dev/biometric/sensor2/fingerprint	first fingerprint sensor on third device
+		  ...
+
+233 char	PathScale InfiniPath interconnect
+		0 = /dev/ipath        Primary device for programs (any unit)
+		1 = /dev/ipath0       Access specifically to unit 0
+		2 = /dev/ipath1       Access specifically to unit 1
+		  ...
+		4 = /dev/ipath3       Access specifically to unit 3
+		129 = /dev/ipath_sma    Device used by Subnet Management Agent
+		130 = /dev/ipath_diag   Device used by diagnostics programs
+
+234-239		UNASSIGNED
 
 240-254 char	LOCAL/EXPERIMENTAL USE
 240-254 block	LOCAL/EXPERIMENTAL USE
@@ -3021,6 +3091,28 @@ Your cooperation is appreciated.
 		This major is reserved to assist the expansion to a
 		larger number space.  No device nodes with this major
 		should ever be created on the filesystem.
+		(This is probaly not true anymore, but I'll leave it
+		for now /Torben)
+
+---LARGE MAJORS!!!!!---
+
+256 char	Equinox SST multi-port serial boards
+		   0 = /dev/ttyEQ0	First serial port on first Equinox SST board
+		 127 = /dev/ttyEQ127	Last serial port on first Equinox SST board
+		 128 = /dev/ttyEQ128	First serial port on second Equinox SST board
+		  ...
+		1027 = /dev/ttyEQ1027	Last serial port on eighth Equinox SST board
+
+256 block	Resident Flash Disk Flash Translation Layer
+		  0 = /dev/rfda		First RFD FTL layer
+		 16 = /dev/rfdb		Second RFD FTL layer
+		  ...
+		240 = /dev/rfdp		16th RFD FTL layer
+
+257 char	Phoenix Technologies Cryptographic Services Driver
+		  0 = /dev/ptlsec	Crypto Services Driver
+
+
 
  ****	ADDITIONAL /dev DIRECTORY ENTRIES
 

Documentation/digiepca.txt

@@ -2,7 +2,7 @@ NOTE:  This driver is obsolete.  Digi provides a 2.6 driver (dgdm) at
 http://www.digi.com for PCI cards.  They no longer maintain this driver,
 and have no 2.6 driver for ISA cards.
 
-This driver requires a number of user-space tools.  They can be aquired from
+This driver requires a number of user-space tools.  They can be acquired from
 http://www.digi.com, but only works with 2.4 kernels.
 
 

Documentation/driver-model/overview.txt

@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ Traditional driver models implemented some sort of tree-like structure
 (sometimes just a list) for the devices they control. There wasn't any
 uniformity across the different bus types.
 
-The current driver model provides a comon, uniform data model for describing
+The current driver model provides a common, uniform data model for describing
 a bus and the devices that can appear under the bus. The unified bus
 model includes a set of common attributes which all busses carry, and a set
 of common callbacks, such as device discovery during bus probing, bus

Documentation/drivers/edac/edac.txt

@@ -35,15 +35,14 @@ the vendor should tie the parity status bits to 0 if they do not intend
 to generate parity.  Some vendors do not do this, and thus the parity bit
 can "float" giving false positives.
 
-The PCI Parity EDAC device has the ability to "skip" known flaky
-cards during the parity scan. These are set by the parity "blacklist"
-interface in the sysfs for PCI Parity. (See the PCI section in the sysfs
-section below.) There is also a parity "whitelist" which is used as
-an explicit list of devices to scan, while the blacklist is a list
-of devices to skip.
+[There are patches in the kernel queue which will allow for storage of
+quirks of PCI devices reporting false parity positives. The 2.6.18
+kernel should have those patches included. When that becomes available,
+then EDAC will be patched to utilize that information to "skip" such
+devices.]
 
-EDAC will have future error detectors that will be added or integrated
-into EDAC in the following list:
+EDAC will have future error detectors that will be integrated with
+EDAC or added to it, in the following list:
 
 	MCE	Machine Check Exception
 	MCA	Machine Check Architecture
@@ -93,22 +92,24 @@ EDAC lives in the /sys/devices/system/edac directory. Within this directory
 there currently reside 2 'edac' components:
 
 	mc	memory controller(s) system
-	pci	PCI status system
+	pci	PCI control and status system
 
 
 ============================================================================
 Memory Controller (mc) Model
 
 First a background on the memory controller's model abstracted in EDAC.
-Each mc device controls a set of DIMM memory modules. These modules are
+Each 'mc' device controls a set of DIMM memory modules. These modules are
 laid out in a Chip-Select Row (csrowX) and Channel table (chX). There can
-be multiple csrows and two channels.
+be multiple csrows and multiple channels.
 
 Memory controllers allow for several csrows, with 8 csrows being a typical value.
 Yet, the actual number of csrows depends on the electrical "loading"
 of a given motherboard, memory controller and DIMM characteristics.
 
 Dual channels allows for 128 bit data transfers to the CPU from memory.
+Some newer chipsets allow for more than 2 channels, like Fully Buffered DIMMs
+(FB-DIMMs). The following example will assume 2 channels:
 
 
 		Channel 0	Channel 1
@@ -234,23 +235,15 @@ Polling period control file:
 	The time period, in milliseconds, for polling for error information.
 	Too small a value wastes resources.  Too large a value might delay
 	necessary handling of errors and might loose valuable information for
-	locating the error.  1000 milliseconds (once each second) is about
-	right for most uses.
+	locating the error.  1000 milliseconds (once each second) is the current
+	default. Systems which require all the bandwidth they can get, may
+	increase this.
 
 	LOAD TIME: module/kernel parameter: poll_msec=[0|1]
 
 	RUN TIME: echo "1000" >/sys/devices/system/edac/mc/poll_msec
 
 
-Module Version read-only attribute file:
-
-	'mc_version'
-
-	The EDAC CORE module's version and compile date are shown here to
-	indicate what EDAC is running.
-
-
-
 ============================================================================
 'mcX' DIRECTORIES
 
@@ -284,35 +277,6 @@ Seconds since last counter reset control file:
 
 
 
-DIMM capability attribute file:
-
-	'edac_capability'
-
-	The EDAC (Error Detection and Correction) capabilities/modes of
-	the memory controller hardware.
-
-
-DIMM Current Capability attribute file:
-
-	'edac_current_capability'
-
-	The EDAC capabilities available with the hardware
-	configuration.  This may not be the same as "EDAC capability"
-	if the correct memory is not used.  If a memory controller is
-	capable of EDAC, but DIMMs without check bits are in use, then
-	Parity, SECDED, S4ECD4ED capabilities will not be available
-	even though the memory controller might be capable of those
-	modes with the proper memory loaded.
-
-
-Memory Type supported on this controller attribute file:
-
-	'supported_mem_type'
-
-	This attribute file displays the memory type, usually
-	buffered and unbuffered DIMMs.
-
-
 Memory Controller name attribute file:
 
 	'mc_name'
@@ -321,16 +285,6 @@ Memory Controller name attribute file:
 	that is being utilized.
 
 
-Memory Controller Module name attribute file:
-
-	'module_name'
-
-	This attribute file displays the memory controller module name,
-	version and date built.  The name of the memory controller
-	hardware - some drivers work with multiple controllers and
-	this field shows which hardware is present.
-
-
 Total memory managed by this memory controller attribute file:
 
 	'size_mb'
@@ -432,6 +386,9 @@ Memory Type attribute file:
 
 	This attribute file will display what type of memory is currently
 	on this csrow. Normally, either buffered or unbuffered memory.
+	Examples:
+		Registered-DDR
+		Unbuffered-DDR
 
 
 EDAC Mode of operation attribute file:
@@ -446,8 +403,13 @@ Device type attribute file:
 
 	'dev_type'
 
-	This attribute file will display what type of DIMM device is
-	being utilized. Example:  x4
+	This attribute file will display what type of DRAM device is
+	being utilized on this DIMM.
+	Examples:
+		x1
+		x2
+		x4
+		x8
 
 
 Channel 0 CE Count attribute file:
@@ -522,10 +484,10 @@ SYSTEM LOGGING
 If logging for UEs and CEs are enabled then system logs will have
 error notices indicating errors that have been detected:
 
-MC0: CE page 0x283, offset 0xce0, grain 8, syndrome 0x6ec3, row 0,
+EDAC MC0: CE page 0x283, offset 0xce0, grain 8, syndrome 0x6ec3, row 0,
 channel 1 "DIMM_B1": amd76x_edac
 
-MC0: CE page 0x1e5, offset 0xfb0, grain 8, syndrome 0xb741, row 0,
+EDAC MC0: CE page 0x1e5, offset 0xfb0, grain 8, syndrome 0xb741, row 0,
 channel 1 "DIMM_B1": amd76x_edac
 
 
@@ -610,64 +572,4 @@ Parity Count:
 
 
 
-PCI Device Whitelist:
-
-	'pci_parity_whitelist'
-
-	This control file allows for an explicit list of PCI devices to be
-	scanned for parity errors. Only devices found on this list will
-	be examined.  The list is a line of hexadecimal VENDOR and DEVICE
-	ID tuples:
-
-	1022:7450,1434:16a6
-
-	One or more can be inserted, separated by a comma.
-
-	To write the above list doing the following as one command line:
-
-	echo "1022:7450,1434:16a6"
-		> /sys/devices/system/edac/pci/pci_parity_whitelist
-
-
-
-	To display what the whitelist is, simply 'cat' the same file.
-
-
-PCI Device Blacklist:
-
-	'pci_parity_blacklist'
-
-	This control file allows for a list of PCI devices to be
-	skipped for scanning.
-	The list is a line of hexadecimal VENDOR and DEVICE ID tuples:
-
-	1022:7450,1434:16a6
-
-	One or more can be inserted, separated by a comma.
-
-	To write the above list doing the following as one command line:
-
-	echo "1022:7450,1434:16a6"
-		> /sys/devices/system/edac/pci/pci_parity_blacklist
-
-
-	To display what the whitelist currently contains,
-	simply 'cat' the same file.
-
 =======================================================================
-
-PCI Vendor and Devices IDs can be obtained with the lspci command. Using
-the -n option lspci will display the vendor and device IDs. The system
-administrator will have to determine which devices should be scanned or
-skipped.
-
-
-
-The two lists (white and black) are prioritized. blacklist is the lower
-priority and will NOT be utilized when a whitelist has been set.
-Turn OFF a whitelist by an empty echo command:
-
-	echo > /sys/devices/system/edac/pci/pci_parity_whitelist
-
-and any previous blacklist will be utilized.
-

Documentation/fb/fbcon.txt

@@ -135,10 +135,10 @@ C. Boot options
 
 	The angle can be changed anytime afterwards by 'echoing' the same
 	numbers to any one of the 2 attributes found in
-	/sys/class/graphics/fb{x}
+	 /sys/class/graphics/fbcon
 
-		con_rotate     - rotate the display of the active console
-		con_rotate_all - rotate the display of all consoles
+		rotate     - rotate the display of the active console
+		rotate_all - rotate the display of all consoles
 
 	Console rotation will only become available if Console Rotation
 	Support is compiled in your kernel.
@@ -148,5 +148,177 @@ C. Boot options
 	Actually, the underlying fb driver is totally ignorant of console
 	rotation.
 
----
+C. Attaching, Detaching and Unloading
+
+Before going on on how to attach, detach and unload the framebuffer console, an
+illustration of the dependencies may help.
+
+The console layer, as with most subsystems, needs a driver that interfaces with
+the hardware. Thus, in a VGA console:
+
+console ---> VGA driver ---> hardware.
+
+Assuming the VGA driver can be unloaded, one must first unbind the VGA driver
+from the console layer before unloading the driver.  The VGA driver cannot be
+unloaded if it is still bound to the console layer. (See
+Documentation/console/console.txt for more information).
+
+This is more complicated in the case of the the framebuffer console (fbcon),
+because fbcon is an intermediate layer between the console and the drivers:
+
+console ---> fbcon ---> fbdev drivers ---> hardware
+
+The fbdev drivers cannot be unloaded if it's bound to fbcon, and fbcon cannot
+be unloaded if it's bound to the console layer.
+
+So to unload the fbdev drivers, one must first unbind fbcon from the console,
+then unbind the fbdev drivers from fbcon.  Fortunately, unbinding fbcon from
+the console layer will automatically unbind framebuffer drivers from
+fbcon. Thus, there is no need to explicitly unbind the fbdev drivers from
+fbcon.
+
+So, how do we unbind fbcon from the console? Part of the answer is in
+Documentation/console/console.txt. To summarize:
+
+Echo a value to the bind file that represents the framebuffer console
+driver. So assuming vtcon1 represents fbcon, then:
+
+echo 1 > sys/class/vtconsole/vtcon1/bind - attach framebuffer console to
+                                           console layer
+echo 0 > sys/class/vtconsole/vtcon1/bind - detach framebuffer console from
+                                           console layer
+
+If fbcon is detached from the console layer, your boot console driver (which is
+usually VGA text mode) will take over.  A few drivers (rivafb and i810fb) will
+restore VGA text mode for you.  With the rest, before detaching fbcon, you
+must take a few additional steps to make sure that your VGA text mode is
+restored properly. The following is one of the several methods that you can do:
+
+1. Download or install vbetool.  This utility is included with most
+   distributions nowadays, and is usually part of the suspend/resume tool.
+
+2. In your kernel configuration, ensure that CONFIG_FRAMEBUFFER_CONSOLE is set
+   to 'y' or 'm'. Enable one or more of your favorite framebuffer drivers.
+
+3. Boot into text mode and as root run:
+
+	vbetool vbestate save > <vga state file>
+
+	The above command saves the register contents of your graphics
+	hardware to <vga state file>.  You need to do this step only once as
+	the state file can be reused.
+
+4. If fbcon is compiled as a module, load fbcon by doing:
+
+       modprobe fbcon
+
+5. Now to detach fbcon:
+
+       vbetool vbestate restore < <vga state file> && \
+       echo 0 > /sys/class/vtconsole/vtcon1/bind
+
+6. That's it, you're back to VGA mode. And if you compiled fbcon as a module,
+   you can unload it by 'rmmod fbcon'
+
+7. To reattach fbcon:
+
+       echo 1 > /sys/class/vtconsole/vtcon1/bind
+
+8. Once fbcon is unbound, all drivers registered to the system will also
+become unbound.  This means that fbcon and individual framebuffer drivers
+can be unloaded or reloaded at will. Reloading the drivers or fbcon will
+automatically bind the console, fbcon and the drivers together. Unloading
+all the drivers without unloading fbcon will make it impossible for the
+console to bind fbcon.
+
+Notes for vesafb users:
+=======================
+
+Unfortunately, if your bootline includes a vga=xxx parameter that sets the
+hardware in graphics mode, such as when loading vesafb, vgacon will not load.
+Instead, vgacon will replace the default boot console with dummycon, and you
+won't get any display after detaching fbcon. Your machine is still alive, so
+you can reattach vesafb. However, to reattach vesafb, you need to do one of
+the following:
+
+Variation 1:
+
+    a. Before detaching fbcon, do
+
+       vbetool vbemode save > <vesa state file> # do once for each vesafb mode,
+						# the file can be reused
+
+    b. Detach fbcon as in step 5.
+
+    c. Attach fbcon
+
+        vbetool vbestate restore < <vesa state file> && \
+	echo 1 > /sys/class/vtconsole/vtcon1/bind
+
+Variation 2:
+
+    a. Before detaching fbcon, do:
+	echo <ID> > /sys/class/tty/console/bind
+
+
+       vbetool vbemode get
+
+    b. Take note of the mode number
+
+    b. Detach fbcon as in step 5.
+
+    c. Attach fbcon:
+
+       vbetool vbemode set <mode number> && \
+       echo 1 > /sys/class/vtconsole/vtcon1/bind
+
+Samples:
+========
+
+Here are 2 sample bash scripts that you can use to bind or unbind the
+framebuffer console driver if you are in an X86 box:
+
+---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+#!/bin/bash
+# Unbind fbcon
+
+# Change this to where your actual vgastate file is located
+# Or Use VGASTATE=$1 to indicate the state file at runtime
+VGASTATE=/tmp/vgastate
+
+# path to vbetool
+VBETOOL=/usr/local/bin
+
+
+for (( i = 0; i < 16; i++))
+do
+  if test -x /sys/class/vtconsole/vtcon$i; then
+      if [ `cat /sys/class/vtconsole/vtcon$i/name | grep -c "frame buffer"` \
+           = 1 ]; then
+	    if test -x $VBETOOL/vbetool; then
+	       echo Unbinding vtcon$i
+	       $VBETOOL/vbetool vbestate restore < $VGASTATE
+	       echo 0 > /sys/class/vtconsole/vtcon$i/bind
+	    fi
+      fi
+  fi
+done
+
+---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+#!/bin/bash
+# Bind fbcon
+
+for (( i = 0; i < 16; i++))
+do
+  if test -x /sys/class/vtconsole/vtcon$i; then
+      if [ `cat /sys/class/vtconsole/vtcon$i/name | grep -c "frame buffer"` \
+           = 1 ]; then
+	  echo Unbinding vtcon$i
+	  echo 1 > /sys/class/vtconsole/vtcon$i/bind
+      fi
+  fi
+done
+---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+--
 Antonino Daplas <adaplas@pol.net>

Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt

@@ -6,17 +6,6 @@ be removed from this file.
 
 ---------------------------
 
-What:	devfs
-When:	July 2005
-Files:	fs/devfs/*, include/linux/devfs_fs*.h and assorted devfs
-	function calls throughout the kernel tree
-Why:	It has been unmaintained for a number of years, has unfixable
-	races, contains a naming policy within the kernel that is
-	against the LSB, and can be replaced by using udev.
-Who:	Greg Kroah-Hartman <greg@kroah.com>
-
----------------------------
-
 What:	RAW driver (CONFIG_RAW_DRIVER)
 When:	December 2005
 Why:	declared obsolete since kernel 2.6.3
@@ -33,27 +22,12 @@ Who:	Adrian Bunk <bunk@stusta.de>
 
 ---------------------------
 
-What:	RCU API moves to EXPORT_SYMBOL_GPL
-When:	April 2006
-Files:	include/linux/rcupdate.h, kernel/rcupdate.c
-Why:	Outside of Linux, the only implementations of anything even
-	vaguely resembling RCU that I am aware of are in DYNIX/ptx,
-	VM/XA, Tornado, and K42.  I do not expect anyone to port binary
-	drivers or kernel modules from any of these, since the first two
-	are owned by IBM and the last two are open-source research OSes.
-	So these will move to GPL after a grace period to allow
-	people, who might be using implementations that I am not aware
-	of, to adjust to this upcoming change.
-Who:	Paul E. McKenney <paulmck@us.ibm.com>
-
----------------------------
-
 What:	raw1394: requests of type RAW1394_REQ_ISO_SEND, RAW1394_REQ_ISO_LISTEN
-When:	November 2005
+When:	November 2006
 Why:	Deprecated in favour of the new ioctl-based rawiso interface, which is
 	more efficient.  You should really be using libraw1394 for raw1394
 	access anyway.
-Who:	Jody McIntyre <scjody@steamballoon.com>
+Who:	Jody McIntyre <scjody@modernduck.com>
 
 ---------------------------
 
@@ -81,14 +55,6 @@ Who:	Mauro Carvalho Chehab <mchehab@brturbo.com.br>
 
 ---------------------------
 
-What:	remove EXPORT_SYMBOL(insert_resource)
-When:	April 2006
-Files:	kernel/resource.c
-Why:	No modular usage in the kernel.
-Who:	Adrian Bunk <bunk@stusta.de>
-
----------------------------
-
 What:	PCMCIA control ioctl (needed for pcmcia-cs [cardmgr, cardctl])
 When:	November 2005
 Files:	drivers/pcmcia/: pcmcia_ioctl.c
@@ -147,16 +113,6 @@ Who:	NeilBrown <neilb@suse.de>
 
 ---------------------------
 
-What:	au1x00_uart driver
-When:	January 2006
-Why:	The 8250 serial driver now has the ability to deal with the differences
-	between the standard 8250 family of UARTs and their slightly strange
-	brother on Alchemy SOCs.  The loss of features is not considered an
-	issue.
-Who:	Ralf Baechle <ralf@linux-mips.org>
-
----------------------------
-
 What:   eepro100 network driver
 When:   January 2007
 Why:    replaced by the e100 driver
@@ -192,14 +148,13 @@ Who:	Jean Delvare <khali@linux-fr.org>
 
 ---------------------------
 
-What:	remove EXPORT_SYMBOL(tasklist_lock)
-When:	August 2006
-Files:	kernel/fork.c
-Why:	tasklist_lock protects the kernel internal task list.  Modules have
-	no business looking at it, and all instances in drivers have been due
-	to use of too-lowlevel APIs.  Having this symbol exported prevents
-	moving to more scalable locking schemes for the task list.
-Who:	Christoph Hellwig <hch@lst.de>
+What:	Unused EXPORT_SYMBOL/EXPORT_SYMBOL_GPL exports
+	(temporary transition config option provided until then)
+	The transition config option will also be removed at the same time.
+When:	before 2.6.19
+Why:	Unused symbols are both increasing the size of the kernel binary
+	and are often a sign of "wrong API"
+Who:	Arjan van de Ven <arjan@linux.intel.com>
 
 ---------------------------
 
@@ -212,15 +167,6 @@ Who:	Greg Kroah-Hartman <gregkh@suse.de>
 
 ---------------------------
 
-What:	Support for NEC DDB5074 and DDB5476 evaluation boards.
-When:	June 2006
-Why:	Board specific code doesn't build anymore since ~2.6.0 and no
-	users have complained indicating there is no more need for these
-	boards.  This should really be considered a last call.
-Who:	Ralf Baechle <ralf@linux-mips.org>
-
----------------------------
-
 What:	USB driver API moves to EXPORT_SYMBOL_GPL
 When:	Febuary 2008
 Files:	include/linux/usb.h, drivers/usb/core/driver.c
@@ -248,3 +194,67 @@ Why:	The interface no longer has any callers left in the kernel. It
 Who:	Nick Piggin <npiggin@suse.de>
 
 ---------------------------
+
+What:	Support for the MIPS EV96100 evaluation board
+When:	September 2006
+Why:	Does no longer build since at least November 15, 2003, apparently
+	no userbase left.
+Who:	Ralf Baechle <ralf@linux-mips.org>
+
+---------------------------
+
+What:	Support for the Momentum / PMC-Sierra Jaguar ATX evaluation board
+When:	September 2006
+Why:	Does no longer build since quite some time, and was never popular,
+	due to the platform being replaced by successor models.  Apparently
+	no user base left.  It also is one of the last users of
+	WANT_PAGE_VIRTUAL.
+Who:	Ralf Baechle <ralf@linux-mips.org>
+
+---------------------------
+
+What:	Support for the Momentum Ocelot, Ocelot 3, Ocelot C and Ocelot G
+When:	September 2006
+Why:	Some do no longer build and apparently there is no user base left
+	for these platforms.
+Who:	Ralf Baechle <ralf@linux-mips.org>
+
+---------------------------
+
+What:	Support for MIPS Technologies' Altas and SEAD evaluation board
+When:	September 2006
+Why:	Some do no longer build and apparently there is no user base left
+	for these platforms.  Hardware out of production since several years.
+Who:	Ralf Baechle <ralf@linux-mips.org>
+
+---------------------------
+
+What:	Support for the IT8172-based platforms, ITE 8172G and Globespan IVR
+When:	September 2006
+Why:	Code does no longer build since at least 2.6.0,  apparently there is
+	no user base left for these platforms.  Hardware out of production
+	since several years and hardly a trace of the manufacturer left on
+	the net.
+Who:	Ralf Baechle <ralf@linux-mips.org>
+
+---------------------------
+
+What:	Interrupt only SA_* flags
+When:	Januar 2007
+Why:	The interrupt related SA_* flags are replaced by IRQF_* to move them
+	out of the signal namespace.
+
+Who:	Thomas Gleixner <tglx@linutronix.de>
+
+---------------------------
+
+What:	i2c-ite and i2c-algo-ite drivers
+When:	September 2006
+Why:	These drivers never compiled since they were added to the kernel
+	tree 5 years ago. This feature removal can be reevaluated if
+	someone shows interest in the drivers, fixes them and takes over
+	maintenance.
+	http://marc.theaimsgroup.com/?l=linux-mips&m=115040510817448
+Who:	Jean Delvare <khali@linux-fr.org>
+
+---------------------------

Documentation/filesystems/Locking

@@ -99,7 +99,7 @@ prototypes:
 	int (*sync_fs)(struct super_block *sb, int wait);
 	void (*write_super_lockfs) (struct super_block *);
 	void (*unlockfs) (struct super_block *);
-	int (*statfs) (struct super_block *, struct kstatfs *);
+	int (*statfs) (struct dentry *, struct kstatfs *);
 	int (*remount_fs) (struct super_block *, int *, char *);
 	void (*clear_inode) (struct inode *);
 	void (*umount_begin) (struct super_block *);
@@ -142,15 +142,16 @@ see also dquot_operations section.
 
 --------------------------- file_system_type ---------------------------
 prototypes:
-	struct super_block *(*get_sb) (struct file_system_type *, int,
-			const char *, void *);
+	int (*get_sb) (struct file_system_type *, int,
+		       const char *, void *, struct vfsmount *);
 	void (*kill_sb) (struct super_block *);
 locking rules:
 		may block	BKL
 get_sb		yes		yes
 kill_sb		yes		yes
 
-->get_sb() returns error or a locked superblock (exclusive on ->s_umount).
+->get_sb() returns error or 0 with locked superblock attached to the vfsmount
+(exclusive on ->s_umount).
 ->kill_sb() takes a write-locked superblock, does all shutdown work on it,
 unlocks and drops the reference.
 

Documentation/filesystems/automount-support.txt

@@ -19,7 +19,7 @@ following procedure:
 
  (2) Have the follow_link() op do the following steps:
 
-     (a) Call do_kern_mount() to call the appropriate filesystem to set up a
+     (a) Call vfs_kern_mount() to call the appropriate filesystem to set up a
          superblock and gain a vfsmount structure representing it.
 
      (b) Copy the nameidata provided as an argument and substitute the dentry

Documentation/filesystems/configfs/configfs_example.c

@@ -264,6 +264,15 @@ static struct config_item_type simple_child_type = {
 };
 
 
+struct simple_children {
+	struct config_group group;
+};
+
+static inline struct simple_children *to_simple_children(struct config_item *item)
+{
+	return item ? container_of(to_config_group(item), struct simple_children, group) : NULL;
+}
+
 static struct config_item *simple_children_make_item(struct config_group *group, const char *name)
 {
 	struct simple_child *simple_child;
@@ -304,7 +313,13 @@ static ssize_t simple_children_attr_show(struct config_item *item,
 "items have only one attribute that is readable and writeable.\n");
 }
 
+static void simple_children_release(struct config_item *item)
+{
+	kfree(to_simple_children(item));
+}
+
 static struct configfs_item_operations simple_children_item_ops = {
+	.release 	= simple_children_release,
 	.show_attribute	= simple_children_attr_show,
 };
 
@@ -345,10 +360,6 @@ static struct configfs_subsystem simple_children_subsys = {
  * children of its own.
  */
 
-struct simple_children {
-	struct config_group group;
-};
-
 static struct config_group *group_children_make_group(struct config_group *group, const char *name)
 {
 	struct simple_children *simple_children;

Documentation/filesystems/devfs/ToDo

@@ -1,40 +0,0 @@
-		Device File System (devfs) ToDo List
-
-		Richard Gooch <rgooch@atnf.csiro.au>
-
-			      3-JUL-2000
-
-This is a list of things to be done for better devfs support in the
-Linux kernel. If you'd like to contribute to the devfs, please have a
-look at this list for anything that is unallocated. Also, if there are
-items missing (surely), please contact me so I can add them to the
-list (preferably with your name attached to them:-).
-
-
-- >256 ptys
-  Thanks to C. Scott Ananian <cananian@alumni.princeton.edu>
-
-- Amiga floppy driver (drivers/block/amiflop.c)
-
-- Atari floppy driver (drivers/block/ataflop.c)
-
-- SWIM3 (Super Woz Integrated Machine 3) floppy driver (drivers/block/swim3.c)
-
-- Amiga ZorroII ramdisc driver (drivers/block/z2ram.c)
-
-- Parallel port ATAPI CD-ROM (drivers/block/paride/pcd.c)
-
-- Parallel port ATAPI floppy (drivers/block/paride/pf.c)
-
-- AP1000 block driver (drivers/ap1000/ap.c, drivers/ap1000/ddv.c)
-
-- Archimedes floppy (drivers/acorn/block/fd1772.c)
-
-- MFM hard drive (drivers/acorn/block/mfmhd.c)
-
-- I2O block device (drivers/message/i2o/i2o_block.c)
-
-- ST-RAM device (arch/m68k/atari/stram.c)
-
-- Raw devices
-

Documentation/filesystems/devfs/boot-options

@@ -1,65 +0,0 @@
-/* -*- auto-fill -*-                                                         */
-
-		Device File System (devfs) Boot Options
-
-		Richard Gooch <rgooch@atnf.csiro.au>
-
-			      18-AUG-2001
-
-
-When CONFIG_DEVFS_DEBUG is enabled, you can pass several boot options
-to the kernel to debug devfs. The boot options are prefixed by
-"devfs=", and are separated by commas. Spaces are not allowed. The
-syntax looks like this:
-
-devfs=<option1>,<option2>,<option3>
-
-and so on. For example, if you wanted to turn on debugging for module
-load requests and device registration, you would do:
-
-devfs=dmod,dreg
-
-You may prefix "no" to any option. This will invert the option.
-
-
-Debugging Options
-=================
-
-These requires CONFIG_DEVFS_DEBUG to be enabled.
-Note that all debugging options have 'd' as the first character. By
-default all options are off. All debugging output is sent to the
-kernel logs. The debugging options do not take effect until the devfs
-version message appears (just prior to the root filesystem being
-mounted).
-
-These are the options:
-
-dmod		print module load requests to <request_module>
-
-dreg		print device register requests to <devfs_register>
-
-dunreg		print device unregister requests to <devfs_unregister>
-
-dchange		print device change requests to <devfs_set_flags>
-
-dilookup	print inode lookup requests
-
-diget		print VFS inode allocations
-
-diunlink	print inode unlinks
-
-dichange	print inode changes
-
-dimknod		print calls to mknod(2)
-
-dall		some debugging turned on
-
-
-Other Options
-=============
-
-These control the default behaviour of devfs. The options are:
-
-mount		mount devfs onto /dev at boot time
-
-only		disable non-devfs device nodes for devfs-capable drivers

Documentation/filesystems/ext3.txt

@@ -113,6 +113,14 @@ noquota
 grpquota
 usrquota
 
+bh		(*)	ext3 associates buffer heads to data pages to
+nobh			(a) cache disk block mapping information
+			(b) link pages into transaction to provide
+			    ordering guarantees.
+			"bh" option forces use of buffer heads.
+			"nobh" option tries to avoid associating buffer
+			heads (supported only for "writeback" mode).
+
 
 Specification
 =============

Documentation/filesystems/fuse.txt

@@ -18,6 +18,14 @@ Non-privileged mount (or user mount):
   user.  NOTE: this is not the same as mounts allowed with the "user"
   option in /etc/fstab, which is not discussed here.
 
+Filesystem connection:
+
+  A connection between the filesystem daemon and the kernel.  The
+  connection exists until either the daemon dies, or the filesystem is
+  umounted.  Note that detaching (or lazy umounting) the filesystem
+  does _not_ break the connection, in this case it will exist until
+  the last reference to the filesystem is released.
+
 Mount owner:
 
   The user who does the mounting.
@@ -86,16 +94,20 @@ Mount options
   The default is infinite.  Note that the size of read requests is
   limited anyway to 32 pages (which is 128kbyte on i386).
 
-Sysfs
-~~~~~
+Control filesystem
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
 
-FUSE sets up the following hierarchy in sysfs:
+There's a control filesystem for FUSE, which can be mounted by:
 
-  /sys/fs/fuse/connections/N/
+  mount -t fusectl none /sys/fs/fuse/connections
 
-where N is an increasing number allocated to each new connection.
+Mounting it under the '/sys/fs/fuse/connections' directory makes it
+backwards compatible with earlier versions.
 
-For each connection the following attributes are defined:
+Under the fuse control filesystem each connection has a directory
+named by a unique number.
+
+For each connection the following files exist within this directory:
 
  'waiting'
 
@@ -110,7 +122,47 @@ For each connection the following attributes are defined:
   connection.  This means that all waiting requests will be aborted an
   error returned for all aborted and new requests.
 
-Only a privileged user may read or write these attributes.
+Only the owner of the mount may read or write these files.
+
+Interrupting filesystem operations
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+If a process issuing a FUSE filesystem request is interrupted, the
+following will happen:
+
+  1) If the request is not yet sent to userspace AND the signal is
+     fatal (SIGKILL or unhandled fatal signal), then the request is
+     dequeued and returns immediately.
+
+  2) If the request is not yet sent to userspace AND the signal is not
+     fatal, then an 'interrupted' flag is set for the request.  When
+     the request has been successfully transfered to userspace and
+     this flag is set, an INTERRUPT request is queued.
+
+  3) If the request is already sent to userspace, then an INTERRUPT
+     request is queued.
+
+INTERRUPT requests take precedence over other requests, so the
+userspace filesystem will receive queued INTERRUPTs before any others.
+
+The userspace filesystem may ignore the INTERRUPT requests entirely,
+or may honor them by sending a reply to the _original_ request, with
+the error set to EINTR.
+
+It is also possible that there's a race between processing the
+original request and it's INTERRUPT request.  There are two possibilities:
+
+  1) The INTERRUPT request is processed before the original request is
+     processed
+
+  2) The INTERRUPT request is processed after the original request has
+     been answered
+
+If the filesystem cannot find the original request, it should wait for
+some timeout and/or a number of new requests to arrive, after which it
+should reply to the INTERRUPT request with an EAGAIN error.  In case
+1) the INTERRUPT request will be requeued.  In case 2) the INTERRUPT
+reply will be ignored.
 
 Aborting a filesystem connection
 ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
@@ -139,8 +191,8 @@ the filesystem.  There are several ways to do this:
   - Use forced umount (umount -f).  Works in all cases but only if
     filesystem is still attached (it hasn't been lazy unmounted)
 
-  - Abort filesystem through the sysfs interface.  Most powerful
-    method, always works.
+  - Abort filesystem through the FUSE control filesystem.  Most
+    powerful method, always works.
 
 How do non-privileged mounts work?
 ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
@@ -304,25 +356,7 @@ Scenario 1 -  Simple deadlock
  |                                    |     for "file"]
  |                                    |    *DEADLOCK*
 
-The solution for this is to allow requests to be interrupted while
-they are in userspace:
-
- |      [interrupted by signal]       |
- |    <fuse_unlink()                  |
- |    [release semaphore]             |    [semaphore acquired]
- |  <sys_unlink()                     |
- |                                    |    >fuse_unlink()
- |                                    |      [queue req on fc->pending]
- |                                    |      [wake up fc->waitq]
- |                                    |      [sleep on req->waitq]
-
-If the filesystem daemon was single threaded, this will stop here,
-since there's no other thread to dequeue and execute the request.
-In this case the solution is to kill the FUSE daemon as well.  If
-there are multiple serving threads, you just have to kill them as
-long as any remain.
-
-Moral: a filesystem which deadlocks, can soon find itself dead.
+The solution for this is to allow the filesystem to be aborted.
 
 Scenario 2 - Tricky deadlock
 ----------------------------
@@ -355,24 +389,14 @@ but is caused by a pagefault.
  |                                    |           [lock page]
  |                                    |           * DEADLOCK *
 
-Solution is again to let the the request be interrupted (not
-elaborated further).
+Solution is basically the same as above.
 
-An additional problem is that while the write buffer is being
-copied to the request, the request must not be interrupted.  This
-is because the destination address of the copy may not be valid
-after the request is interrupted.
+An additional problem is that while the write buffer is being copied
+to the request, the request must not be interrupted/aborted.  This is
+because the destination address of the copy may not be valid after the
+request has returned.
 
-This is solved with doing the copy atomically, and allowing
-interruption while the page(s) belonging to the write buffer are
-faulted with get_user_pages().  The 'req->locked' flag indicates
-when the copy is taking place, and interruption is delayed until
-this flag is unset.
-
-Scenario 3 - Tricky deadlock with asynchronous read
----------------------------------------------------
-
-The same situation as above, except thread-1 will wait on page lock
-and hence it will be uninterruptible as well.  The solution is to
-abort the connection with forced umount (if mount is attached) or
-through the abort attribute in sysfs.
+This is solved with doing the copy atomically, and allowing abort
+while the page(s) belonging to the write buffer are faulted with
+get_user_pages().  The 'req->locked' flag indicates when the copy is
+taking place, and abort is delayed until this flag is unset.

Documentation/filesystems/inotify.txt

@@ -69,17 +69,135 @@ Prototypes:
 	int inotify_rm_watch (int fd, __u32 mask);
 
 
-(iii) Internal Kernel Implementation
+(iii) Kernel Interface
 
-Each inotify instance is associated with an inotify_device structure.
+Inotify's kernel API consists a set of functions for managing watches and an
+event callback.
+
+To use the kernel API, you must first initialize an inotify instance with a set
+of inotify_operations.  You are given an opaque inotify_handle, which you use
+for any further calls to inotify.
+
+    struct inotify_handle *ih = inotify_init(my_event_handler);
+
+You must provide a function for processing events and a function for destroying
+the inotify watch.
+
+    void handle_event(struct inotify_watch *watch, u32 wd, u32 mask,
+    	              u32 cookie, const char *name, struct inode *inode)
+
+	watch - the pointer to the inotify_watch that triggered this call
+	wd - the watch descriptor
+	mask - describes the event that occurred
+	cookie - an identifier for synchronizing events
+	name - the dentry name for affected files in a directory-based event
+	inode - the affected inode in a directory-based event
+
+    void destroy_watch(struct inotify_watch *watch)
+
+You may add watches by providing a pre-allocated and initialized inotify_watch
+structure and specifying the inode to watch along with an inotify event mask.
+You must pin the inode during the call.  You will likely wish to embed the
+inotify_watch structure in a structure of your own which contains other
+information about the watch.  Once you add an inotify watch, it is immediately
+subject to removal depending on filesystem events.  You must grab a reference if
+you depend on the watch hanging around after the call.
+
+    inotify_init_watch(&my_watch->iwatch);
+    inotify_get_watch(&my_watch->iwatch);	// optional
+    s32 wd = inotify_add_watch(ih, &my_watch->iwatch, inode, mask);
+    inotify_put_watch(&my_watch->iwatch);	// optional
+
+You may use the watch descriptor (wd) or the address of the inotify_watch for
+other inotify operations.  You must not directly read or manipulate data in the
+inotify_watch.  Additionally, you must not call inotify_add_watch() more than
+once for a given inotify_watch structure, unless you have first called either
+inotify_rm_watch() or inotify_rm_wd().
+
+To determine if you have already registered a watch for a given inode, you may
+call inotify_find_watch(), which gives you both the wd and the watch pointer for
+the inotify_watch, or an error if the watch does not exist.
+
+    wd = inotify_find_watch(ih, inode, &watchp);
+
+You may use container_of() on the watch pointer to access your own data
+associated with a given watch.  When an existing watch is found,
+inotify_find_watch() bumps the refcount before releasing its locks.  You must
+put that reference with:
+
+    put_inotify_watch(watchp);
+
+Call inotify_find_update_watch() to update the event mask for an existing watch.
+inotify_find_update_watch() returns the wd of the updated watch, or an error if
+the watch does not exist.
+
+    wd = inotify_find_update_watch(ih, inode, mask);
+
+An existing watch may be removed by calling either inotify_rm_watch() or
+inotify_rm_wd().
+
+    int ret = inotify_rm_watch(ih, &my_watch->iwatch);
+    int ret = inotify_rm_wd(ih, wd);
+
+A watch may be removed while executing your event handler with the following:
+
+    inotify_remove_watch_locked(ih, iwatch);
+
+Call inotify_destroy() to remove all watches from your inotify instance and
+release it.  If there are no outstanding references, inotify_destroy() will call
+your destroy_watch op for each watch.
+
+    inotify_destroy(ih);
+
+When inotify removes a watch, it sends an IN_IGNORED event to your callback.
+You may use this event as an indication to free the watch memory.  Note that
+inotify may remove a watch due to filesystem events, as well as by your request.
+If you use IN_ONESHOT, inotify will remove the watch after the first event, at
+which point you may call the final inotify_put_watch.
+
+(iv) Kernel Interface Prototypes
+
+	struct inotify_handle *inotify_init(struct inotify_operations *ops);
+
+	inotify_init_watch(struct inotify_watch *watch);
+
+	s32 inotify_add_watch(struct inotify_handle *ih,
+		              struct inotify_watch *watch,
+			      struct inode *inode, u32 mask);
+
+	s32 inotify_find_watch(struct inotify_handle *ih, struct inode *inode,
+			       struct inotify_watch **watchp);
+
+	s32 inotify_find_update_watch(struct inotify_handle *ih,
+				      struct inode *inode, u32 mask);
+
+	int inotify_rm_wd(struct inotify_handle *ih, u32 wd);
+
+	int inotify_rm_watch(struct inotify_handle *ih,
+			     struct inotify_watch *watch);
+
+	void inotify_remove_watch_locked(struct inotify_handle *ih,
+					 struct inotify_watch *watch);
+
+	void inotify_destroy(struct inotify_handle *ih);
+
+	void get_inotify_watch(struct inotify_watch *watch);
+	void put_inotify_watch(struct inotify_watch *watch);
+
+
+(v) Internal Kernel Implementation
+
+Each inotify instance is represented by an inotify_handle structure.
+Inotify's userspace consumers also have an inotify_device which is
+associated with the inotify_handle, and on which events are queued.
 
 Each watch is associated with an inotify_watch structure.  Watches are chained
-off of each associated device and each associated inode.
+off of each associated inotify_handle and each associated inode.
 
-See fs/inotify.c for the locking and lifetime rules.
+See fs/inotify.c and fs/inotify_user.c for the locking and lifetime rules.
 
 
-(iv) Rationale
+(vi) Rationale
 
 Q: What is the design decision behind not tying the watch to the open fd of
    the watched object?
@@ -145,7 +263,7 @@ A: The poor user-space interface is the second biggest problem with dnotify.
    file descriptor-based one that allows basic file I/O and poll/select.
    Obtaining the fd and managing the watches could have been done either via a
    device file or a family of new system calls.  We decided to implement a
-   family of system calls because that is the preffered approach for new kernel
+   family of system calls because that is the preferred approach for new kernel
    interfaces.  The only real difference was whether we wanted to use open(2)
    and ioctl(2) or a couple of new system calls.  System calls beat ioctls.
 

Documentation/filesystems/porting

@@ -50,10 +50,11 @@ Turn your foo_read_super() into a function that would return 0 in case of
 success and negative number in case of error (-EINVAL unless you have more
 informative error value to report).  Call it foo_fill_super().  Now declare
 
-struct super_block foo_get_sb(struct file_system_type *fs_type,
-	int flags, const char *dev_name, void *data)
+int foo_get_sb(struct file_system_type *fs_type,
+	int flags, const char *dev_name, void *data, struct vfsmount *mnt)
 {
-	return get_sb_bdev(fs_type, flags, dev_name, data, ext2_fill_super);
+	return get_sb_bdev(fs_type, flags, dev_name, data, foo_fill_super,
+			   mnt);
 }
 
 (or similar with s/bdev/nodev/ or s/bdev/single/, depending on the kind of

Documentation/filesystems/ramfs-rootfs-initramfs.txt

@@ -70,11 +70,13 @@ tmpfs mounts.  See Documentation/filesystems/tmpfs.txt for more information.
 What is rootfs?
 ---------------
 
-Rootfs is a special instance of ramfs, which is always present in 2.6 systems.
-(It's used internally as the starting and stopping point for searches of the
-kernel's doubly-linked list of mount points.)
+Rootfs is a special instance of ramfs (or tmpfs, if that's enabled), which is
+always present in 2.6 systems.  You can't unmount rootfs for approximately the
+same reason you can't kill the init process; rather than having special code
+to check for and handle an empty list, it's smaller and simpler for the kernel
+to just make sure certain lists can't become empty.
 
-Most systems just mount another filesystem over it and ignore it.  The
+Most systems just mount another filesystem over rootfs and ignore it.  The
 amount of space an empty instance of ramfs takes up is tiny.
 
 What is initramfs?
@@ -92,14 +94,16 @@ out of that.
 
 All this differs from the old initrd in several ways:
 
-  - The old initrd was a separate file, while the initramfs archive is linked
-    into the linux kernel image.  (The directory linux-*/usr is devoted to
-    generating this archive during the build.)
+  - The old initrd was always a separate file, while the initramfs archive is
+    linked into the linux kernel image.  (The directory linux-*/usr is devoted
+    to generating this archive during the build.)
 
   - The old initrd file was a gzipped filesystem image (in some file format,
-    such as ext2, that had to be built into the kernel), while the new
+    such as ext2, that needed a driver built into the kernel), while the new
     initramfs archive is a gzipped cpio archive (like tar only simpler,
-    see cpio(1) and Documentation/early-userspace/buffer-format.txt).
+    see cpio(1) and Documentation/early-userspace/buffer-format.txt).  The
+    kernel's cpio extraction code is not only extremely small, it's also
+    __init data that can be discarded during the boot process.
 
   - The program run by the old initrd (which was called /initrd, not /init) did
     some setup and then returned to the kernel, while the init program from
@@ -124,13 +128,14 @@ Populating initramfs:
 
 The 2.6 kernel build process always creates a gzipped cpio format initramfs
 archive and links it into the resulting kernel binary.  By default, this
-archive is empty (consuming 134 bytes on x86).  The config option
-CONFIG_INITRAMFS_SOURCE (for some reason buried under devices->block devices
-in menuconfig, and living in usr/Kconfig) can be used to specify a source for
-the initramfs archive, which will automatically be incorporated into the
-resulting binary.  This option can point to an existing gzipped cpio archive, a
-directory containing files to be archived, or a text file specification such
-as the following example:
+archive is empty (consuming 134 bytes on x86).
+
+The config option CONFIG_INITRAMFS_SOURCE (for some reason buried under
+devices->block devices in menuconfig, and living in usr/Kconfig) can be used
+to specify a source for the initramfs archive, which will automatically be
+incorporated into the resulting binary.  This option can point to an existing
+gzipped cpio archive, a directory containing files to be archived, or a text
+file specification such as the following example:
 
   dir /dev 755 0 0
   nod /dev/console 644 0 0 c 5 1
@@ -146,23 +151,84 @@ as the following example:
 Run "usr/gen_init_cpio" (after the kernel build) to get a usage message
 documenting the above file format.
 
-One advantage of the text file is that root access is not required to
+One advantage of the configuration file is that root access is not required to
 set permissions or create device nodes in the new archive.  (Note that those
 two example "file" entries expect to find files named "init.sh" and "busybox" in
 a directory called "initramfs", under the linux-2.6.* directory.  See
 Documentation/early-userspace/README for more details.)
 
-The kernel does not depend on external cpio tools, gen_init_cpio is created
-from usr/gen_init_cpio.c which is entirely self-contained, and the kernel's
-boot-time extractor is also (obviously) self-contained.  However, if you _do_
-happen to have cpio installed, the following command line can extract the
-generated cpio image back into its component files:
+The kernel does not depend on external cpio tools.  If you specify a
+directory instead of a configuration file, the kernel's build infrastructure
+creates a configuration file from that directory (usr/Makefile calls
+scripts/gen_initramfs_list.sh), and proceeds to package up that directory
+using the config file (by feeding it to usr/gen_init_cpio, which is created
+from usr/gen_init_cpio.c).  The kernel's build-time cpio creation code is
+entirely self-contained, and the kernel's boot-time extractor is also
+(obviously) self-contained.
+
+The one thing you might need external cpio utilities installed for is creating
+or extracting your own preprepared cpio files to feed to the kernel build
+(instead of a config file or directory).
+
+The following command line can extract a cpio image (either by the above script
+or by the kernel build) back into its component files:
 
   cpio -i -d -H newc -F initramfs_data.cpio --no-absolute-filenames
 
+The following shell script can create a prebuilt cpio archive you can
+use in place of the above config file:
+
+  #!/bin/sh
+
+  # Copyright 2006 Rob Landley <rob@landley.net> and TimeSys Corporation.
+  # Licensed under GPL version 2
+
+  if [ $# -ne 2 ]
+  then
+    echo "usage: mkinitramfs directory imagename.cpio.gz"
+    exit 1
+  fi
+
+  if [ -d "$1" ]
+  then
+    echo "creating $2 from $1"
+    (cd "$1"; find . | cpio -o -H newc | gzip) > "$2"
+  else
+    echo "First argument must be a directory"
+    exit 1
+  fi
+
+Note: The cpio man page contains some bad advice that will break your initramfs
+archive if you follow it.  It says "A typical way to generate the list
+of filenames is with the find command; you should give find the -depth option
+to minimize problems with permissions on directories that are unwritable or not
+searchable."  Don't do this when creating initramfs.cpio.gz images, it won't
+work.  The Linux kernel cpio extractor won't create files in a directory that
+doesn't exist, so the directory entries must go before the files that go in
+those directories.  The above script gets them in the right order.
+
+External initramfs images:
+--------------------------
+
+If the kernel has initrd support enabled, an external cpio.gz archive can also
+be passed into a 2.6 kernel in place of an initrd.  In this case, the kernel
+will autodetect the type (initramfs, not initrd) and extract the external cpio
+archive into rootfs before trying to run /init.
+
+This has the memory efficiency advantages of initramfs (no ramdisk block
+device) but the separate packaging of initrd (which is nice if you have
+non-GPL code you'd like to run from initramfs, without conflating it with
+the GPL licensed Linux kernel binary).
+
+It can also be used to supplement the kernel's built-in initamfs image.  The
+files in the external archive will overwrite any conflicting files in
+the built-in initramfs archive.  Some distributors also prefer to customize
+a single kernel image with task-specific initramfs images, without recompiling.
+
 Contents of initramfs:
 ----------------------
 
+An initramfs archive is a complete self-contained root filesystem for Linux.
 If you don't already understand what shared libraries, devices, and paths
 you need to get a minimal root filesystem up and running, here are some
 references:
@@ -176,13 +242,36 @@ code against, along with some related utilities.  It is BSD licensed.
 
 I use uClibc (http://www.uclibc.org) and busybox (http://www.busybox.net)
 myself.  These are LGPL and GPL, respectively.  (A self-contained initramfs
-package is planned for the busybox 1.2 release.)
+package is planned for the busybox 1.3 release.)
 
 In theory you could use glibc, but that's not well suited for small embedded
 uses like this.  (A "hello world" program statically linked against glibc is
 over 400k.  With uClibc it's 7k.  Also note that glibc dlopens libnss to do
 name lookups, even when otherwise statically linked.)
 
+A good first step is to get initramfs to run a statically linked "hello world"
+program as init, and test it under an emulator like qemu (www.qemu.org) or
+User Mode Linux, like so:
+
+  cat > hello.c << EOF
+  #include <stdio.h>
+  #include <unistd.h>
+
+  int main(int argc, char *argv[])
+  {
+    printf("Hello world!\n");
+    sleep(999999999);
+  }
+  EOF
+  gcc -static hello2.c -o init
+  echo init | cpio -o -H newc | gzip > test.cpio.gz
+  # Testing external initramfs using the initrd loading mechanism.
+  qemu -kernel /boot/vmlinuz -initrd test.cpio.gz /dev/zero
+
+When debugging a normal root filesystem, it's nice to be able to boot with
+"init=/bin/sh".  The initramfs equivalent is "rdinit=/bin/sh", and it's
+just as useful.
+
 Why cpio rather than tar?
 -------------------------
 
@@ -241,7 +330,7 @@ the above threads) is:
 Future directions:
 ------------------
 
-Today (2.6.14), initramfs is always compiled in, but not always used.  The
+Today (2.6.16), initramfs is always compiled in, but not always used.  The
 kernel falls back to legacy boot code that is reached only if initramfs does
 not contain an /init program.  The fallback is legacy code, there to ensure a
 smooth transition and allowing early boot functionality to gradually move to
@@ -258,8 +347,9 @@ and so on.
 
 This kind of complexity (which inevitably includes policy) is rightly handled
 in userspace.  Both klibc and busybox/uClibc are working on simple initramfs
-packages to drop into a kernel build, and when standard solutions are ready
-and widely deployed, the kernel's legacy early boot code will become obsolete
-and a candidate for the feature removal schedule.
+packages to drop into a kernel build.
 
-But that's a while off yet.
+The klibc package has now been accepted into Andrew Morton's 2.6.17-mm tree.
+The kernel's current early boot code (partition detection, etc) will probably
+be migrated into a default initramfs, automatically created and used by the
+kernel build.

Documentation/filesystems/vfs.txt

@@ -113,8 +113,8 @@ members are defined:
 struct file_system_type {
 	const char *name;
 	int fs_flags;
-        struct super_block *(*get_sb) (struct file_system_type *, int,
-                                       const char *, void *);
+        int (*get_sb) (struct file_system_type *, int,
+                       const char *, void *, struct vfsmount *);
         void (*kill_sb) (struct super_block *);
         struct module *owner;
         struct file_system_type * next;
@@ -211,7 +211,7 @@ struct super_operations {
         int (*sync_fs)(struct super_block *sb, int wait);
         void (*write_super_lockfs) (struct super_block *);
         void (*unlockfs) (struct super_block *);
-        int (*statfs) (struct super_block *, struct kstatfs *);
+        int (*statfs) (struct dentry *, struct kstatfs *);
         int (*remount_fs) (struct super_block *, int *, char *);
         void (*clear_inode) (struct inode *);
         void (*umount_begin) (struct super_block *);

Documentation/hwmon/abituguru

@@ -0,0 +1,87 @@
+Kernel driver abituguru
+=======================
+
+Supported chips:
+  * Abit uGuru revision 1-3 (Hardware Monitor part only)
+    Prefix: 'abituguru'
+    Addresses scanned: ISA 0x0E0
+    Datasheet: Not available, this driver is based on reverse engineering.
+	A "Datasheet" has been written based on the reverse engineering it
+	should be available in the same dir as this file under the name
+	abituguru-datasheet.
+    Note:
+	The uGuru is a microcontroller with onboard firmware which programs
+	it to behave as a hwmon IC. There are many different revisions of the
+	firmware and thus effectivly many different revisions of the uGuru.
+	Below is an incomplete list with which revisions are used for which
+	Motherboards:
+	uGuru 1.00    ~ 1.24    (AI7, KV8-MAX3, AN7) (1)
+	uGuru 2.0.0.0 ~ 2.0.4.2 (KV8-PRO)
+	uGuru 2.1.0.0 ~ 2.1.2.8 (AS8, AV8, AA8, AG8, AA8XE, AX8)
+	uGuru 2.2.0.0 ~ 2.2.0.6 (AA8 Fatal1ty)
+	uGuru 2.3.0.0 ~ 2.3.0.9 (AN8)
+	uGuru 3.0.0.0 ~ 3.0.1.2 (AW8, AL8, NI8)
+	uGuru 4.xxxxx?          (AT8 32X) (2)
+	1) For revisions 2 and 3 uGuru's the driver can autodetect the
+	   sensortype (Volt or Temp) for bank1 sensors, for revision 1 uGuru's
+	   this doesnot always work. For these uGuru's the autodection can
+	   be overriden with the bank1_types module param. For all 3 known
+	   revison 1 motherboards the correct use of this param is:
+	   bank1_types=1,1,0,0,0,0,0,2,0,0,0,0,2,0,0,1
+	   You may also need to specify the fan_sensors option for these boards
+	   fan_sensors=5
+	2) The current version of the abituguru driver is known to NOT work
+	   on these Motherboards
+
+Authors:
+	Hans de Goede <j.w.r.degoede@hhs.nl>,
+	(Initial reverse engineering done by Olle Sandberg
+	 <ollebull@gmail.com>)
+
+
+Module Parameters
+-----------------
+
+* force: bool		Force detection. Note this parameter only causes the
+			detection to be skipped, if the uGuru can't be read
+			the module initialization (insmod) will still fail.
+* bank1_types: int[]	Bank1 sensortype autodetection override:
+			  -1 autodetect (default)
+			   0 volt sensor
+			   1 temp sensor
+			   2 not connected
+* fan_sensors: int	Tell the driver how many fan speed sensors there are
+			on your motherboard. Default: 0 (autodetect).
+* pwms: int		Tell the driver how many fan speed controls (fan
+			pwms) your motherboard has. Default: 0 (autodetect).
+* verbose: int		How verbose should the driver be? (0-3):
+			   0 normal output
+			   1 + verbose error reporting
+			   2 + sensors type probing info (default)
+			   3 + retryable error reporting
+			Default: 2 (the driver is still in the testing phase)
+
+Notice if you need any of the first three options above please insmod the
+driver with verbose set to 3 and mail me <j.w.r.degoede@hhs.nl> the output of:
+dmesg | grep abituguru
+
+
+Description
+-----------
+
+This driver supports the hardware monitoring features of the Abit uGuru chip
+found on Abit uGuru featuring motherboards (most modern Abit motherboards).
+
+The uGuru chip in reality is a Winbond W83L950D in disguise (despite Abit
+claiming it is "a new microprocessor designed by the ABIT Engineers").
+Unfortunatly this doesn't help since the W83L950D is a generic
+microcontroller with a custom Abit application running on it.
+
+Despite Abit not releasing any information regarding the uGuru, Olle
+Sandberg <ollebull@gmail.com> has managed to reverse engineer the sensor part
+of the uGuru. Without his work this driver would not have been possible.
+
+Known Issues
+------------
+
+The voltage and frequency control parts of the Abit uGuru are not supported.

Documentation/hwmon/abituguru-datasheet

@@ -0,0 +1,312 @@
+uGuru datasheet
+===============
+
+First of all, what I know about uGuru is no fact based on any help, hints or
+datasheet from Abit. The data I have got on uGuru have I assembled through
+my weak knowledge in "backwards engineering".
+And just for the record, you may have noticed uGuru isn't a chip developed by
+Abit, as they claim it to be. It's realy just an microprocessor (uC) created by
+Winbond (W83L950D). And no, reading the manual for this specific uC or
+mailing  Windbond for help won't give any usefull data about uGuru, as it is
+the program inside the uC that is responding to calls.
+
+Olle Sandberg <ollebull@gmail.com>, 2005-05-25
+
+
+Original version by Olle Sandberg who did the heavy lifting of the initial
+reverse engineering. This version has been almost fully rewritten for clarity
+and extended with write support and info on more databanks, the write support
+is once again reverse engineered by Olle the additional databanks have been
+reverse engineered by me. I would like to express my thanks to Olle, this
+document and the Linux driver could not have been written without his efforts.
+
+Note: because of the lack of specs only the sensors part of the uGuru is
+described here and not the CPU / RAM / etc voltage & frequency control.
+
+Hans de Goede <j.w.r.degoede@hhs.nl>, 28-01-2006
+
+
+Detection
+=========
+
+As far as known the uGuru is always placed at and using the (ISA) I/O-ports
+0xE0 and 0xE4, so we don't have to scan any port-range, just check what the two
+ports are holding for detection. We will refer to 0xE0 as CMD (command-port)
+and 0xE4 as DATA because Abit refers to them with these names.
+
+If DATA holds 0x00 or 0x08 and CMD holds 0x00 or 0xAC an uGuru could be
+present. We have to check for two different values at data-port, because
+after a reboot uGuru will hold 0x00 here, but if the driver is removed and
+later on attached again data-port will hold 0x08, more about this later.
+
+After wider testing of the Linux kernel driver some variants of the uGuru have
+turned up which will hold 0x00 instead of 0xAC at the CMD port, thus we also
+have to test CMD for two different values. On these uGuru's DATA will initally
+hold 0x09 and will only hold 0x08 after reading CMD first, so CMD must be read
+first!
+
+To be really sure an uGuru is present a test read of one or more register
+sets should be done.
+
+
+Reading / Writing
+=================
+
+Addressing
+----------
+
+The uGuru has a number of different addressing levels. The first addressing
+level we will call banks. A bank holds data for one or more sensors. The data
+in a bank for a sensor is one or more bytes large.
+
+The number of bytes is fixed for a given bank, you should always read or write
+that many bytes, reading / writing more will fail, the results when writing
+less then the number of bytes for a given bank are undetermined.
+
+See below for all known bank addresses, numbers of sensors in that bank,
+number of bytes data per sensor and contents/meaning of those bytes.
+
+Although both this document and the kernel driver have kept the sensor
+terminoligy for the addressing within a bank this is not 100% correct, in
+bank 0x24 for example the addressing within the bank selects a PWM output not
+a sensor.
+
+Notice that some banks have both a read and a write address this is how the
+uGuru determines if a read from or a write to the bank is taking place, thus
+when reading you should always use the read address and when writing the
+write address. The write address is always one (1) more then the read address.
+
+
+uGuru ready
+-----------
+
+Before you can read from or write to the uGuru you must first put the uGuru
+in "ready" mode.
+
+To put the uGuru in ready mode first write 0x00 to DATA and then wait for DATA
+to hold 0x09, DATA should read 0x09 within 250 read cycles.
+
+Next CMD _must_ be read and should hold 0xAC, usually CMD will hold 0xAC the
+first read but sometimes it takes a while before CMD holds 0xAC and thus it
+has to be read a number of times (max 50).
+
+After reading CMD, DATA should hold 0x08 which means that the uGuru is ready
+for input. As above DATA will usually hold 0x08 the first read but not always.
+This step can be skipped, but it is undetermined what happens if the uGuru has
+not yet reported 0x08 at DATA and you proceed with writing a bank address.
+
+
+Sending bank and sensor addresses to the uGuru
+----------------------------------------------
+
+First the uGuru must be in "ready" mode as described above, DATA should hold
+0x08 indicating that the uGuru wants input, in this case the bank address.
+
+Next write the bank address to DATA. After the bank address has been written
+wait for to DATA to hold 0x08 again indicating that it wants / is ready for
+more input (max 250 reads).
+
+Once DATA holds 0x08 again write the sensor address to CMD.
+
+
+Reading
+-------
+
+First send the bank and sensor addresses as described above.
+Then for each byte of data you want to read wait for DATA to hold 0x01
+which indicates that the uGuru is ready to be read (max 250 reads) and once
+DATA holds 0x01 read the byte from CMD.
+
+Once all bytes have been read data will hold 0x09, but there is no reason to
+test for this. Notice that the number of bytes is bank address dependent see
+above and below.
+
+After completing a successfull read it is advised to put the uGuru back in
+ready mode, so that it is ready for the next read / write cycle. This way
+if your program / driver is unloaded and later loaded again the detection
+algorithm described above will still work.
+
+
+
+Writing
+-------
+
+First send the bank and sensor addresses as described above.
+Then for each byte of data you want to write wait for DATA to hold 0x00
+which indicates that the uGuru is ready to be written (max 250 reads) and
+once DATA holds 0x00 write the byte to CMD.
+
+Once all bytes have been written wait for DATA to hold 0x01 (max 250 reads)
+don't ask why this is the way it is.
+
+Once DATA holds 0x01 read CMD it should hold 0xAC now.
+
+After completing a successfull write it is advised to put the uGuru back in
+ready mode, so that it is ready for the next read / write cycle. This way
+if your program / driver is unloaded and later loaded again the detection
+algorithm described above will still work.
+
+
+Gotchas
+-------
+
+After wider testing of the Linux kernel driver some variants of the uGuru have
+turned up which do not hold 0x08 at DATA within 250 reads after writing the
+bank address. With these versions this happens quite frequent, using larger
+timeouts doesn't help, they just go offline for a second or 2, doing some
+internal callibration or whatever. Your code should be prepared to handle
+this and in case of no response in this specific case just goto sleep for a
+while and then retry.
+
+
+Address Map
+===========
+
+Bank 0x20 Alarms (R)
+--------------------
+This bank contains 0 sensors, iow the sensor address is ignored (but must be
+written) just use 0. Bank 0x20 contains 3 bytes:
+
+Byte 0:
+This byte holds the alarm flags for sensor 0-7 of Sensor Bank1, with bit 0
+corresponding to sensor 0, 1 to 1, etc.
+
+Byte 1:
+This byte holds the alarm flags for sensor 8-15 of Sensor Bank1, with bit 0
+corresponding to sensor 8, 1 to 9, etc.
+
+Byte 2:
+This byte holds the alarm flags for sensor 0-5 of Sensor Bank2, with bit 0
+corresponding to sensor 0, 1 to 1, etc.
+
+
+Bank 0x21 Sensor Bank1 Values / Readings (R)
+--------------------------------------------
+This bank contains 16 sensors, for each sensor it contains 1 byte.
+So far the following sensors are known to be available on all motherboards:
+Sensor  0 CPU temp
+Sensor  1 SYS temp
+Sensor  3 CPU core volt
+Sensor  4 DDR volt
+Sensor 10 DDR Vtt volt
+Sensor 15 PWM temp
+
+Byte 0:
+This byte holds the reading from the sensor. Sensors in Bank1 can be both
+volt and temp sensors, this is motherboard specific. The uGuru however does
+seem to know (be programmed with) what kindoff sensor is attached see Sensor
+Bank1 Settings description.
+
+Volt sensors use a linear scale, a reading 0 corresponds with 0 volt and a
+reading of 255 with 3494 mV. The sensors for higher voltages however are
+connected through a division circuit. The currently known division circuits
+in use result in ranges of: 0-4361mV, 0-6248mV or 0-14510mV. 3.3 volt sources
+use the 0-4361mV range, 5 volt the 0-6248mV and 12 volt the 0-14510mV .
+
+Temp sensors also use a linear scale, a reading of 0 corresponds with 0 degree
+Celsius and a reading of 255 with a reading of 255 degrees Celsius.
+
+
+Bank 0x22 Sensor Bank1 Settings (R)
+Bank 0x23 Sensor Bank1 Settings (W)
+-----------------------------------
+
+This bank contains 16 sensors, for each sensor it contains 3 bytes. Each
+set of 3 bytes contains the settings for the sensor with the same sensor
+address in Bank 0x21 .
+
+Byte 0:
+Alarm behaviour for the selected sensor. A 1 enables the described behaviour.
+Bit 0: Give an alarm if measured temp is over the warning threshold	(RW) *
+Bit 1: Give an alarm if measured volt is over the max threshold		(RW) **
+Bit 2: Give an alarm if measured volt is under the min threshold	(RW) **
+Bit 3: Beep if alarm							(RW)
+Bit 4: 1 if alarm cause measured temp is over the warning threshold	(R)
+Bit 5: 1 if alarm cause measured volt is over the max threshold		(R)
+Bit 6: 1 if alarm cause measured volt is under the min threshold	(R)
+Bit 7: Volt sensor: Shutdown if alarm persist for more then 4 seconds	(RW)
+       Temp sensor: Shutdown if temp is over the shutdown threshold	(RW)
+
+*  This bit is only honored/used by the uGuru if a temp sensor is connected
+** This bit is only honored/used by the uGuru if a volt sensor is connected
+Note with some trickery this can be used to find out what kinda sensor is
+detected see the Linux kernel driver for an example with many comments on
+how todo this.
+
+Byte 1:
+Temp sensor: warning threshold  (scale as bank 0x21)
+Volt sensor: min threshold      (scale as bank 0x21)
+
+Byte 2:
+Temp sensor: shutdown threshold (scale as bank 0x21)
+Volt sensor: max threshold      (scale as bank 0x21)
+
+
+Bank 0x24 PWM outputs for FAN's (R)
+Bank 0x25 PWM outputs for FAN's (W)
+-----------------------------------
+
+This bank contains 3 "sensors", for each sensor it contains 5 bytes.
+Sensor 0 usually controls the CPU fan
+Sensor 1 usually controls the NB (or chipset for single chip) fan
+Sensor 2 usually controls the System fan
+
+Byte 0:
+Flag 0x80 to enable control, Fan runs at 100% when disabled.
+low nibble (temp)sensor address at bank 0x21 used for control.
+
+Byte 1:
+0-255 = 0-12v (linear), specify voltage at which fan will rotate when under
+low threshold temp (specified in byte 3)
+
+Byte 2:
+0-255 = 0-12v (linear), specify voltage at which fan will rotate when above
+high threshold temp (specified in byte 4)
+
+Byte 3:
+Low threshold temp  (scale as bank 0x21)
+
+byte 4:
+High threshold temp (scale as bank 0x21)
+
+
+Bank 0x26 Sensors Bank2 Values / Readings (R)
+---------------------------------------------
+
+This bank contains 6 sensors (AFAIK), for each sensor it contains 1 byte.
+So far the following sensors are known to be available on all motherboards:
+Sensor 0: CPU fan speed
+Sensor 1: NB (or chipset for single chip) fan speed
+Sensor 2: SYS fan speed
+
+Byte 0:
+This byte holds the reading from the sensor. 0-255 = 0-15300 (linear)
+
+
+Bank 0x27 Sensors Bank2 Settings (R)
+Bank 0x28 Sensors Bank2 Settings (W)
+------------------------------------
+
+This bank contains 6 sensors (AFAIK), for each sensor it contains 2 bytes.
+
+Byte 0:
+Alarm behaviour for the selected sensor. A 1 enables the described behaviour.
+Bit 0: Give an alarm if measured rpm is under the min threshold	(RW)
+Bit 3: Beep if alarm						(RW)
+Bit 7: Shutdown if alarm persist for more then 4 seconds	(RW)
+
+Byte 1:
+min threshold (scale as bank 0x26)
+
+
+Warning for the adventerous
+===========================
+
+A word of caution to those who want to experiment and see if they can figure
+the voltage / clock programming out, I tried reading and only reading banks
+0-0x30 with the reading code used for the sensor banks (0x20-0x28) and this
+resulted in a _permanent_ reprogramming of the voltages, luckily I had the
+sensors part configured so that it would shutdown my system on any out of spec
+voltages which proprably safed my computer (after a reboot I managed to
+immediatly enter the bios and reload the defaults). This probably means that
+the read/write cycle for the non sensor part is different from the sensor part.

Documentation/hwmon/lm70

@@ -0,0 +1,31 @@
+Kernel driver lm70
+==================
+
+Supported chip:
+  * National Semiconductor LM70
+    Datasheet: http://www.national.com/pf/LM/LM70.html
+
+Author:
+        Kaiwan N Billimoria <kaiwan@designergraphix.com>
+
+Description
+-----------
+
+This driver implements support for the National Semiconductor LM70
+temperature sensor.
+
+The LM70 temperature sensor chip supports a single temperature sensor.
+It communicates with a host processor (or microcontroller) via an
+SPI/Microwire Bus interface.
+
+Communication with the LM70 is simple: when the temperature is to be sensed,
+the driver accesses the LM70 using SPI communication: 16 SCLK cycles
+comprise the MOSI/MISO loop. At the end of the transfer, the 11-bit 2's
+complement digital temperature (sent via the SIO line), is available in the
+driver for interpretation. This driver makes use of the kernel's in-core
+SPI support.
+
+Thanks to
+---------
+Jean Delvare <khali@linux-fr.org> for mentoring the hwmon-side driver
+development.

Documentation/hwmon/lm83

@@ -7,6 +7,10 @@ Supported chips:
     Addresses scanned: I2C 0x18 - 0x1a, 0x29 - 0x2b, 0x4c - 0x4e
     Datasheet: Publicly available at the National Semiconductor website
                http://www.national.com/pf/LM/LM83.html
+  * National Semiconductor LM82
+    Addresses scanned: I2C 0x18 - 0x1a, 0x29 - 0x2b, 0x4c - 0x4e
+    Datasheet: Publicly available at the National Semiconductor website
+               http://www.national.com/pf/LM/LM82.html
 
 
 Author: Jean Delvare <khali@linux-fr.org>
@@ -15,10 +19,11 @@ Description
 -----------
 
 The LM83 is a digital temperature sensor. It senses its own temperature as
-well as the temperature of up to three external diodes. It is compatible
-with many other devices such as the LM84 and all other ADM1021 clones.
-The main difference between the LM83 and the LM84 in that the later can
-only sense the temperature of one external diode.
+well as the temperature of up to three external diodes. The LM82 is
+a stripped down version of the LM83 that only supports one external diode.
+Both are compatible with many other devices such as the LM84 and all
+other ADM1021 clones. The main difference between the LM83 and the LM84
+in that the later can only sense the temperature of one external diode.
 
 Using the adm1021 driver for a LM83 should work, but only two temperatures
 will be reported instead of four.
@@ -30,12 +35,16 @@ contact us. Note that the LM90 can easily be misdetected as a LM83.
 
 Confirmed motherboards:
     SBS         P014
+    SBS         PSL09
 
 Unconfirmed motherboards:
     Gigabyte    GA-8IK1100
     Iwill       MPX2
     Soltek      SL-75DRV5
 
+The LM82 is confirmed to have been found on most AMD Geode reference
+designs and test platforms.
+
 The driver has been successfully tested by Magnus Forsström, who I'd
 like to thank here. More testers will be of course welcome.
 

Documentation/hwmon/smsc47m192

@@ -0,0 +1,102 @@
+Kernel driver smsc47m192
+========================
+
+Supported chips:
+  * SMSC LPC47M192 and LPC47M997
+    Prefix: 'smsc47m192'
+    Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2c - 0x2d
+    Datasheet: The datasheet for LPC47M192 is publicly available from
+               http://www.smsc.com/
+               The LPC47M997 is compatible for hardware monitoring.
+
+Author: Hartmut Rick <linux@rick.claranet.de>
+        Special thanks to Jean Delvare for careful checking
+        of the code and many helpful comments and suggestions.
+
+
+Description
+-----------
+
+This driver implements support for the hardware sensor capabilities
+of the SMSC LPC47M192 and LPC47M997 Super-I/O chips.
+
+These chips support 3 temperature channels and 8 voltage inputs
+as well as CPU voltage VID input.
+
+They do also have fan monitoring and control capabilities, but the
+these features are accessed via ISA bus and are not supported by this
+driver. Use the 'smsc47m1' driver for fan monitoring and control.
+
+Voltages and temperatures are measured by an 8-bit ADC, the resolution
+of the temperatures is 1 bit per degree C.
+Voltages are scaled such that the nominal voltage corresponds to
+192 counts, i.e. 3/4 of the full range. Thus the available range for
+each voltage channel is 0V ... 255/192*(nominal voltage), the resolution
+is 1 bit per (nominal voltage)/192.
+Both voltage and temperature values are scaled by 1000, the sys files
+show voltages in mV and temperatures in units of 0.001 degC.
+
+The +12V analog voltage input channel (in4_input) is multiplexed with
+bit 4 of the encoded CPU voltage. This means that you either get
+a +12V voltage measurement or a 5 bit CPU VID, but not both.
+The default setting is to use the pin as 12V input, and use only 4 bit VID.
+This driver assumes that the information in the configuration register
+is correct, i.e. that the BIOS has updated the configuration if
+the motherboard has this input wired to VID4.
+
+The temperature and voltage readings are updated once every 1.5 seconds.
+Reading them more often repeats the same values.
+
+
+sysfs interface
+---------------
+
+in0_input	- +2.5V voltage input
+in1_input	- CPU voltage input (nominal 2.25V)
+in2_input	- +3.3V voltage input
+in3_input	- +5V voltage input
+in4_input	- +12V voltage input (may be missing if used as VID4)
+in5_input	- Vcc voltage input (nominal 3.3V)
+		  This is the supply voltage of the sensor chip itself.
+in6_input	- +1.5V voltage input
+in7_input	- +1.8V voltage input
+
+in[0-7]_min,
+in[0-7]_max	- lower and upper alarm thresholds for in[0-7]_input reading
+
+		  All voltages are read and written in mV.
+
+in[0-7]_alarm	- alarm flags for voltage inputs
+		  These files read '1' in case of alarm, '0' otherwise.
+
+temp1_input	- chip temperature measured by on-chip diode
+temp[2-3]_input	- temperature measured by external diodes (one of these would
+		  typically be wired to the diode inside the CPU)
+
+temp[1-3]_min,
+temp[1-3]_max	- lower and upper alarm thresholds for temperatures
+
+temp[1-3]_offset - temperature offset registers
+		  The chip adds the offsets stored in these registers to
+		  the corresponding temperature readings.
+		  Note that temp1 and temp2 offsets share the same register,
+		  they cannot both be different from zero at the same time.
+		  Writing a non-zero number to one of them will reset the other
+		  offset to zero.
+
+		  All temperatures and offsets are read and written in
+		  units of 0.001 degC.
+
+temp[1-3]_alarm - alarm flags for temperature inputs, '1' in case of alarm,
+		  '0' otherwise.
+temp[2-3]_input_fault - diode fault flags for temperature inputs 2 and 3.
+		  A fault is detected if the two pins for the corresponding
+		  sensor are open or shorted, or any of the two is shorted
+		  to ground or Vcc. '1' indicates a diode fault.
+
+cpu0_vid	- CPU voltage as received from the CPU
+
+vrm		- CPU VID standard used for decoding CPU voltage
+
+		  The *_min, *_max, *_offset and vrm files can be read and
+		  written, all others are read-only.

Documentation/hwmon/sysfs-interface

@@ -3,15 +3,15 @@ Naming and data format standards for sysfs files
 
 The libsensors library offers an interface to the raw sensors data
 through the sysfs interface. See libsensors documentation and source for
-more further information. As of writing this document, libsensors
-(from lm_sensors 2.8.3) is heavily chip-dependant. Adding or updating
+further information. As of writing this document, libsensors
+(from lm_sensors 2.8.3) is heavily chip-dependent. Adding or updating
 support for any given chip requires modifying the library's code.
 This is because libsensors was written for the procfs interface
 older kernel modules were using, which wasn't standardized enough.
 Recent versions of libsensors (from lm_sensors 2.8.2 and later) have
 support for the sysfs interface, though.
 
-The new sysfs interface was designed to be as chip-independant as
+The new sysfs interface was designed to be as chip-independent as
 possible.
 
 Note that motherboards vary widely in the connections to sensor chips.
@@ -24,7 +24,7 @@ range using external resistors. Since the values of these resistors
 can change from motherboard to motherboard, the conversions cannot be
 hard coded into the driver and have to be done in user space.
 
-For this reason, even if we aim at a chip-independant libsensors, it will
+For this reason, even if we aim at a chip-independent libsensors, it will
 still require a configuration file (e.g. /etc/sensors.conf) for proper
 values conversion, labeling of inputs and hiding of unused inputs.
 
@@ -39,15 +39,16 @@ If you are developing a userspace application please send us feedback on
 this standard.
 
 Note that this standard isn't completely established yet, so it is subject
-to changes, even important ones. One more reason to use the library instead
-of accessing sysfs files directly.
+to changes. If you are writing a new hardware monitoring driver those
+features can't seem to fit in this interface, please contact us with your
+extension proposal. Keep in mind that backward compatibility must be
+preserved.
 
 Each chip gets its own directory in the sysfs /sys/devices tree.  To
-find all sensor chips, it is easier to follow the symlinks from
-/sys/i2c/devices/
+find all sensor chips, it is easier to follow the device symlinks from
+/sys/class/hwmon/hwmon*.
 
-All sysfs values are fixed point numbers.  To get the true value of some
-of the values, you should divide by the specified value.
+All sysfs values are fixed point numbers.
 
 There is only one value per file, unlike the older /proc specification.
 The common scheme for files naming is: <type><number>_<item>. Usual
@@ -69,28 +70,40 @@ to cause an alarm) is chip-dependent.
 
 -------------------------------------------------------------------------
 
+[0-*]	denotes any positive number starting from 0
+[1-*]	denotes any positive number starting from 1
+RO	read only value
+RW	read/write value
+
+Read/write values may be read-only for some chips, depending on the
+hardware implementation.
+
+All entries are optional, and should only be created in a given driver
+if the chip has the feature.
+
 ************
 * Voltages *
 ************
 
-in[0-8]_min	Voltage min value.
+in[0-*]_min	Voltage min value.
 		Unit: millivolt
-		Read/Write
+		RW
 		
-in[0-8]_max	Voltage max value.
+in[0-*]_max	Voltage max value.
 		Unit: millivolt
-		Read/Write
+		RW
 		
-in[0-8]_input	Voltage input value.
+in[0-*]_input	Voltage input value.
 		Unit: millivolt
-		Read only
+		RO
+		Voltage measured on the chip pin.
 		Actual voltage depends on the scaling resistors on the
 		motherboard, as recommended in the chip datasheet.
 		This varies by chip and by motherboard.
 		Because of this variation, values are generally NOT scaled
 		by the chip driver, and must be done by the application.
 		However, some drivers (notably lm87 and via686a)
-		do scale, with various degrees of success.
+		do scale, because of internal resistors built into a chip.
 		These drivers will output the actual voltage.
 
 		Typical usage:
@@ -104,58 +117,72 @@ in[0-8]_input	Voltage input value.
 			in7_*	varies
 			in8_*	varies
 
-cpu[0-1]_vid	CPU core reference voltage.
+cpu[0-*]_vid	CPU core reference voltage.
 		Unit: millivolt
-		Read only.
+		RO
 		Not always correct.
 
 vrm		Voltage Regulator Module version number. 
-		Read only.
-		Two digit number, first is major version, second is
-		minor version.
+		RW (but changing it should no more be necessary)
+		Originally the VRM standard version multiplied by 10, but now
+		an arbitrary number, as not all standards have a version
+		number.
 		Affects the way the driver calculates the CPU core reference
 		voltage from the vid pins.
 
+Also see the Alarms section for status flags associated with voltages.
+
 
 ********
 * Fans *
 ********
 
-fan[1-3]_min	Fan minimum value
+fan[1-*]_min	Fan minimum value
 		Unit: revolution/min (RPM)
-		Read/Write.
+		RW
 
-fan[1-3]_input	Fan input value.
+fan[1-*]_input	Fan input value.
 		Unit: revolution/min (RPM)
-		Read only.
+		RO
 
-fan[1-3]_div	Fan divisor.
+fan[1-*]_div	Fan divisor.
 		Integer value in powers of two (1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128).
+		RW
 		Some chips only support values 1, 2, 4 and 8.
 		Note that this is actually an internal clock divisor, which
 		affects the measurable speed range, not the read value.
 
+Also see the Alarms section for status flags associated with fans.
+
+
 *******
 * PWM *
 *******
 
-pwm[1-3]	Pulse width modulation fan control.
+pwm[1-*]	Pulse width modulation fan control.
 		Integer value in the range 0 to 255
-		Read/Write
+		RW
 		255 is max or 100%.
 
-pwm[1-3]_enable
+pwm[1-*]_enable
 		Switch PWM on and off.
 		Not always present even if fan*_pwm is.
-		0 to turn off
-		1 to turn on in manual mode
-		2 to turn on in automatic mode
-		Read/Write
+		0: turn off
+		1: turn on in manual mode
+		2+: turn on in automatic mode
+		Check individual chip documentation files for automatic mode details.
+		RW
+
+pwm[1-*]_mode
+		0: DC mode
+		1: PWM mode
+		RW
 
 pwm[1-*]_auto_channels_temp
 		Select which temperature channels affect this PWM output in
 		auto mode. Bitfield, 1 is temp1, 2 is temp2, 4 is temp3 etc...
 		Which values are possible depend on the chip used.
+		RW
 
 pwm[1-*]_auto_point[1-*]_pwm
 pwm[1-*]_auto_point[1-*]_temp
@@ -163,6 +190,7 @@ pwm[1-*]_auto_point[1-*]_temp_hyst
 		Define the PWM vs temperature curve. Number of trip points is
 		chip-dependent. Use this for chips which associate trip points
 		to PWM output channels.
+		RW
 
 OR
 
@@ -172,50 +200,57 @@ temp[1-*]_auto_point[1-*]_temp_hyst
 		Define the PWM vs temperature curve. Number of trip points is
 		chip-dependent. Use this for chips which associate trip points
 		to temperature channels.
+		RW
 
 
 ****************
 * Temperatures *
 ****************
 
-temp[1-3]_type	Sensor type selection.
+temp[1-*]_type	Sensor type selection.
 		Integers 1 to 4 or thermistor Beta value (typically 3435)
-		Read/Write.
+		RW
 		1: PII/Celeron Diode
 		2: 3904 transistor
 		3: thermal diode
 		4: thermistor (default/unknown Beta)
 		Not all types are supported by all chips
 
-temp[1-4]_max	Temperature max value.
-		Unit: millidegree Celcius
-		Read/Write value.
+temp[1-*]_max	Temperature max value.
+		Unit: millidegree Celsius (or millivolt, see below)
+		RW
 
-temp[1-3]_min	Temperature min value.
-		Unit: millidegree Celcius
-		Read/Write value.
+temp[1-*]_min	Temperature min value.
+		Unit: millidegree Celsius
+		RW
 
-temp[1-3]_max_hyst
+temp[1-*]_max_hyst
 		Temperature hysteresis value for max limit.
-		Unit: millidegree Celcius
+		Unit: millidegree Celsius
 		Must be reported as an absolute temperature, NOT a delta
 		from the max value.
-		Read/Write value.
+		RW
 
-temp[1-4]_input Temperature input value.
-		Unit: millidegree Celcius
-		Read only value.
+temp[1-*]_input Temperature input value.
+		Unit: millidegree Celsius
+		RO
 
-temp[1-4]_crit	Temperature critical value, typically greater than
+temp[1-*]_crit	Temperature critical value, typically greater than
 		corresponding temp_max values.
-		Unit: millidegree Celcius
-		Read/Write value.
+		Unit: millidegree Celsius
+		RW
 
-temp[1-2]_crit_hyst
+temp[1-*]_crit_hyst
 		Temperature hysteresis value for critical limit.
-		Unit: millidegree Celcius
+		Unit: millidegree Celsius
 		Must be reported as an absolute temperature, NOT a delta
 		from the critical value.
+		RW
+
+temp[1-4]_offset
+		Temperature offset which is added to the temperature reading
+		by the chip.
+		Unit: millidegree Celsius
 		Read/Write value.
 
 		If there are multiple temperature sensors, temp1_* is
@@ -225,6 +260,17 @@ temp[1-2]_crit_hyst
 		itself, for example the thermal diode inside the CPU or
 		a thermistor nearby.
 
+Some chips measure temperature using external thermistors and an ADC, and
+report the temperature measurement as a voltage. Converting this voltage
+back to a temperature (or the other way around for limits) requires
+mathematical functions not available in the kernel, so the conversion
+must occur in user space. For these chips, all temp* files described
+above should contain values expressed in millivolt instead of millidegree
+Celsius. In other words, such temperature channels are handled as voltage
+channels by the driver.
+
+Also see the Alarms section for status flags associated with temperatures.
+
 
 ************
 * Currents *
@@ -233,25 +279,88 @@ temp[1-2]_crit_hyst
 Note that no known chip provides current measurements as of writing,
 so this part is theoretical, so to say.
 
-curr[1-n]_max	Current max value
+curr[1-*]_max	Current max value
 		Unit: milliampere
-		Read/Write.
+		RW
 
-curr[1-n]_min	Current min value.
+curr[1-*]_min	Current min value.
 		Unit: milliampere
-		Read/Write.
+		RW
 
-curr[1-n]_input	Current input value
+curr[1-*]_input	Current input value
 		Unit: milliampere
-		Read only.
+		RO
 
 
-*********
-* Other *
-*********
+**********
+* Alarms *
+**********
+
+Each channel or limit may have an associated alarm file, containing a
+boolean value. 1 means than an alarm condition exists, 0 means no alarm.
+
+Usually a given chip will either use channel-related alarms, or
+limit-related alarms, not both. The driver should just reflect the hardware
+implementation.
+
+in[0-*]_alarm
+fan[1-*]_alarm
+temp[1-*]_alarm
+		Channel alarm
+		0: no alarm
+		1: alarm
+		RO
+
+OR
+
+in[0-*]_min_alarm
+in[0-*]_max_alarm
+fan[1-*]_min_alarm
+temp[1-*]_min_alarm
+temp[1-*]_max_alarm
+temp[1-*]_crit_alarm
+		Limit alarm
+		0: no alarm
+		1: alarm
+		RO
+
+Each input channel may have an associated fault file. This can be used
+to notify open diodes, unconnected fans etc. where the hardware
+supports it. When this boolean has value 1, the measurement for that
+channel should not be trusted.
+
+in[0-*]_input_fault
+fan[1-*]_input_fault
+temp[1-*]_input_fault
+		Input fault condition
+		0: no fault occured
+		1: fault condition
+		RO
+
+Some chips also offer the possibility to get beeped when an alarm occurs:
+
+beep_enable	Master beep enable
+		0: no beeps
+		1: beeps
+		RW
+
+in[0-*]_beep
+fan[1-*]_beep
+temp[1-*]_beep
+		Channel beep
+		0: disable
+		1: enable
+		RW
+
+In theory, a chip could provide per-limit beep masking, but no such chip
+was seen so far.
+
+Old drivers provided a different, non-standard interface to alarms and
+beeps. These interface files are deprecated, but will be kept around
+for compatibility reasons:
 
 alarms		Alarm bitmask.
-		Read only.
+		RO
 		Integer representation of one to four bytes.
 		A '1' bit means an alarm.
 		Chips should be programmed for 'comparator' mode so that
@@ -259,35 +368,26 @@ alarms		Alarm bitmask.
 		if it is still valid.
 		Generally a direct representation of a chip's internal
 		alarm registers; there is no standard for the position
-		of individual bits.
+		of individual bits. For this reason, the use of this
+		interface file for new drivers is discouraged. Use
+		individual *_alarm and *_fault files instead.
 		Bits are defined in kernel/include/sensors.h.
 
-alarms_in	Alarm bitmask relative to in (voltage) channels
-		Read only
-		A '1' bit means an alarm, LSB corresponds to in0 and so on
-		Prefered to 'alarms' for newer chips
-
-alarms_fan	Alarm bitmask relative to fan channels
-		Read only
-		A '1' bit means an alarm, LSB corresponds to fan1 and so on
-		Prefered to 'alarms' for newer chips
-
-alarms_temp	Alarm bitmask relative to temp (temperature) channels
-		Read only
-		A '1' bit means an alarm, LSB corresponds to temp1 and so on
-		Prefered to 'alarms' for newer chips
-
-beep_enable	Beep/interrupt enable
-		0 to disable.
-		1 to enable.
-		Read/Write
-
 beep_mask	Bitmask for beep.
-		Same format as 'alarms' with the same bit locations.
-		Read/Write
+		Same format as 'alarms' with the same bit locations,
+		use discouraged for the same reason. Use individual
+		*_beep files instead.
+		RW
+
+
+*********
+* Other *
+*********
 
 eeprom		Raw EEPROM data in binary form.
-		Read only.
+		RO
 
 pec		Enable or disable PEC (SMBus only)
-		Read/Write
+		0: disable
+		1: enable
+		RW

Documentation/hwmon/userspace-tools

@@ -6,31 +6,32 @@ voltages, fans speed). They are often connected through an I2C bus, but some
 are also connected directly through the ISA bus.
 
 The kernel drivers make the data from the sensor chips available in the /sys
-virtual filesystem. Userspace tools are then used to display or set or the
-data in a more friendly manner.
+virtual filesystem. Userspace tools are then used to display the measured
+values or configure the chips in a more friendly manner.
 
 Lm-sensors
 ----------
 
-Core set of utilites that will allow you to obtain health information,
+Core set of utilities that will allow you to obtain health information,
 setup monitoring limits etc. You can get them on their homepage
 http://www.lm-sensors.nu/ or as a package from your Linux distribution.
 
 If from website:
-Get lmsensors from project web site. Please note, you need only userspace
-part, so compile with "make user_install" target.
+Get lm-sensors from project web site. Please note, you need only userspace
+part, so compile with "make user" and install with "make user_install".
 
 General hints to get things working:
 
 0) get lm-sensors userspace utils
-1) compile all drivers in I2C section as modules in your kernel
+1) compile all drivers in I2C and Hardware Monitoring sections as modules
+   in your kernel
 2) run sensors-detect script, it will tell you what modules you need to load.
 3) load them and run "sensors" command, you should see some results.
 4) fix sensors.conf, labels, limits, fan divisors
 5) if any more problems consult FAQ, or documentation
 
-Other utilites
---------------
+Other utilities
+---------------
 
 If you want some graphical indicators of system health look for applications
 like: gkrellm, ksensors, xsensors, wmtemp, wmsensors, wmgtemp, ksysguardd,

Documentation/hwmon/w83791d

@@ -0,0 +1,113 @@
+Kernel driver w83791d
+=====================
+
+Supported chips:
+  * Winbond W83791D
+    Prefix: 'w83791d'
+    Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2c - 0x2f
+    Datasheet: http://www.winbond-usa.com/products/winbond_products/pdfs/PCIC/W83791Da.pdf
+
+Author: Charles Spirakis <bezaur@gmail.com>
+
+This driver was derived from the w83781d.c and w83792d.c source files.
+
+Credits:
+  w83781d.c:
+    Frodo Looijaard <frodol@dds.nl>,
+    Philip Edelbrock <phil@netroedge.com>,
+    and Mark Studebaker <mdsxyz123@yahoo.com>
+  w83792d.c:
+    Chunhao Huang <DZShen@Winbond.com.tw>,
+    Rudolf Marek <r.marek@sh.cvut.cz>
+
+Module Parameters
+-----------------
+
+* init boolean
+  (default 0)
+  Use 'init=1' to have the driver do extra software initializations.
+  The default behavior is to do the minimum initialization possible
+  and depend on the BIOS to properly setup the chip. If you know you
+  have a w83791d and you're having problems, try init=1 before trying
+  reset=1.
+
+* reset boolean
+  (default 0)
+  Use 'reset=1' to reset the chip (via index 0x40, bit 7). The default
+  behavior is no chip reset to preserve BIOS settings.
+
+* force_subclients=bus,caddr,saddr,saddr
+  This is used to force the i2c addresses for subclients of
+  a certain chip. Example usage is `force_subclients=0,0x2f,0x4a,0x4b'
+  to force the subclients of chip 0x2f on bus 0 to i2c addresses
+  0x4a and 0x4b.
+
+
+Description
+-----------
+
+This driver implements support for the Winbond W83791D chip.
+
+Detection of the chip can sometimes be foiled because it can be in an
+internal state that allows no clean access (Bank with ID register is not
+currently selected). If you know the address of the chip, use a 'force'
+parameter; this will put it into a more well-behaved state first.
+
+The driver implements three temperature sensors, five fan rotation speed
+sensors, and ten voltage sensors.
+
+Temperatures are measured in degrees Celsius and measurement resolution is 1
+degC for temp1 and 0.5 degC for temp2 and temp3. An alarm is triggered when
+the temperature gets higher than the Overtemperature Shutdown value; it stays
+on until the temperature falls below the Hysteresis value.
+
+Fan rotation speeds are reported in RPM (rotations per minute). An alarm is
+triggered if the rotation speed has dropped below a programmable limit. Fan
+readings can be divided by a programmable divider (1, 2, 4, 8 for fan 1/2/3
+and 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64 or 128 for fan 4/5) to give the readings more
+range or accuracy.
+
+Voltage sensors (also known as IN sensors) report their values in millivolts.
+An alarm is triggered if the voltage has crossed a programmable minimum
+or maximum limit.
+
+Alarms are provided as output from a "realtime status register". The
+following bits are defined:
+
+bit - alarm on:
+0  - Vcore
+1  - VINR0
+2  - +3.3VIN
+3  - 5VDD
+4  - temp1
+5  - temp2
+6  - fan1
+7  - fan2
+8  - +12VIN
+9  - -12VIN
+10 - -5VIN
+11 - fan3
+12 - chassis
+13 - temp3
+14 - VINR1
+15 - reserved
+16 - tart1
+17 - tart2
+18 - tart3
+19 - VSB
+20 - VBAT
+21 - fan4
+22 - fan5
+23 - reserved
+
+When an alarm goes off, you can be warned by a beeping signal through your
+computer speaker. It is possible to enable all beeping globally, or only
+the beeping for some alarms.
+
+The driver only reads the chip values each 3 seconds; reading them more
+often will do no harm, but will return 'old' values.
+
+W83791D TODO:
+---------------
+Provide a patch for per-file alarms as discussed on the mailing list
+Provide a patch for smart-fan control (still need appropriate motherboard/fans)

Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-i801

@@ -21,8 +21,7 @@ Authors:
 Module Parameters
 -----------------
 
-* force_addr: int
-  Forcibly enable the ICH at the given address. EXTREMELY DANGEROUS!
+None.
 
 
 Description

Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-nforce2

@@ -7,6 +7,8 @@ Supported adapters:
   * nForce3 250Gb MCP          10de:00E4 
   * nForce4 MCP                10de:0052
   * nForce4 MCP-04             10de:0034
+  * nForce4 MCP51              10de:0264
+  * nForce4 MCP55              10de:0368
 
 Datasheet: not publically available, but seems to be similar to the
            AMD-8111 SMBus 2.0 adapter.

Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-ocores

@@ -0,0 +1,51 @@
+Kernel driver i2c-ocores
+
+Supported adapters:
+  * OpenCores.org I2C controller by Richard Herveille (see datasheet link)
+    Datasheet: http://www.opencores.org/projects.cgi/web/i2c/overview
+
+Author: Peter Korsgaard <jacmet@sunsite.dk>
+
+Description
+-----------
+
+i2c-ocores is an i2c bus driver for the OpenCores.org I2C controller
+IP core by Richard Herveille.
+
+Usage
+-----
+
+i2c-ocores uses the platform bus, so you need to provide a struct
+platform_device with the base address and interrupt number. The
+dev.platform_data of the device should also point to a struct
+ocores_i2c_platform_data (see linux/i2c-ocores.h) describing the
+distance between registers and the input clock speed.
+
+E.G. something like:
+
+static struct resource ocores_resources[] = {
+	[0] = {
+		.start	= MYI2C_BASEADDR,
+		.end	= MYI2C_BASEADDR + 8,
+		.flags	= IORESOURCE_MEM,
+	},
+	[1] = {
+		.start	= MYI2C_IRQ,
+		.end	= MYI2C_IRQ,
+		.flags	= IORESOURCE_IRQ,
+	},
+};
+
+static struct ocores_i2c_platform_data myi2c_data = {
+	.regstep	= 2,		/* two bytes between registers */
+	.clock_khz	= 50000,	/* input clock of 50MHz */
+};
+
+static struct platform_device myi2c = {
+	.name			= "ocores-i2c",
+	.dev = {
+		.platform_data	= &myi2c_data,
+	},
+	.num_resources		= ARRAY_SIZE(ocores_resources),
+	.resource		= ocores_resources,
+};

Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-piix4

@@ -6,6 +6,8 @@ Supported adapters:
     Datasheet: Publicly available at the Intel website
   * ServerWorks OSB4, CSB5, CSB6 and HT-1000 southbridges
     Datasheet: Only available via NDA from ServerWorks
+  * ATI IXP southbridges IXP200, IXP300, IXP400
+    Datasheet: Not publicly available
   * Standard Microsystems (SMSC) SLC90E66 (Victory66) southbridge
     Datasheet: Publicly available at the SMSC website http://www.smsc.com
 
@@ -21,8 +23,6 @@ Module Parameters
   Forcibly enable the PIIX4. DANGEROUS!
 * force_addr: int
   Forcibly enable the PIIX4 at the given address. EXTREMELY DANGEROUS!
-* fix_hstcfg: int
-  Fix config register. Needed on some boards (Force CPCI735).
 
 
 Description
@@ -63,10 +63,36 @@ The PIIX4E is just an new version of the PIIX4; it is supported as well.
 The PIIX/PIIX3 does not implement an SMBus or I2C bus, so you can't use
 this driver on those mainboards.
 
-The ServerWorks Southbridges, the Intel 440MX, and the Victory766 are
+The ServerWorks Southbridges, the Intel 440MX, and the Victory66 are
 identical to the PIIX4 in I2C/SMBus support.
 
-A few OSB4 southbridges are known to be misconfigured by the BIOS. In this
-case, you have you use the fix_hstcfg module parameter. Do not use it
-unless you know you have to, because in some cases it also breaks
-configuration on southbridges that don't need it.
+If you own Force CPCI735 motherboard or other OSB4 based systems you may need
+to change the SMBus Interrupt Select register so the SMBus controller uses
+the SMI mode.
+
+1) Use lspci command and locate the PCI device with the SMBus controller:
+   00:0f.0 ISA bridge: ServerWorks OSB4 South Bridge (rev 4f)
+   The line may vary for different chipsets. Please consult the driver source
+   for all possible PCI ids (and lspci -n to match them). Lets assume the
+   device is located at 00:0f.0.
+2) Now you just need to change the value in 0xD2 register. Get it first with
+   command: lspci -xxx -s 00:0f.0
+   If the value is 0x3 then you need to change it to 0x1
+   setpci  -s 00:0f.0 d2.b=1
+
+Please note that you don't need to do that in all cases, just when the SMBus is
+not working properly.
+
+
+Hardware-specific issues
+------------------------
+
+This driver will refuse to load on IBM systems with an Intel PIIX4 SMBus.
+Some of these machines have an RFID EEPROM (24RF08) connected to the SMBus,
+which can easily get corrupted due to a state machine bug. These are mostly
+Thinkpad laptops, but desktop systems may also be affected. We have no list
+of all affected systems, so the only safe solution was to prevent access to
+the SMBus on all IBM systems (detected using DMI data.)
+
+For additional information, read:
+http://www2.lm-sensors.nu/~lm78/cvs/lm_sensors2/README.thinkpad

Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-sis96x

@@ -42,8 +42,8 @@ I suspect that this driver could be made to work for the following SiS
 chipsets as well: 635, and 635T. If anyone owns a board with those chips
 AND is willing to risk crashing & burning an otherwise well-behaved kernel
 in the name of progress... please contact me at <mhoffman@lightlink.com> or
-via the project's mailing list: <lm-sensors@lm-sensors.org>.  Please
-send bug reports and/or success stories as well.
+via the project's mailing list: <i2c@lm-sensors.org>.  Please send bug
+reports and/or success stories as well.
 
 
 TO DOs

Documentation/i2c/busses/scx200_acb

@@ -2,14 +2,31 @@ Kernel driver scx200_acb
 
 Author: Christer Weinigel <wingel@nano-system.com>
 
+The driver supersedes the older, never merged driver named i2c-nscacb.
+
 Module Parameters
 -----------------
 
-* base: int
+* base: up to 4 ints
   Base addresses for the ACCESS.bus controllers on SCx200 and SC1100 devices
 
+  By default the driver uses two base addresses 0x820 and 0x840.
+  If you want only one base address, specify the second as 0 so as to
+  override this default.
+
 Description
 -----------
 
 Enable the use of the ACCESS.bus controller on the Geode SCx200 and
 SC1100 processors and the CS5535 and CS5536 Geode companion devices.
+
+Device-specific notes
+---------------------
+
+The SC1100 WRAP boards are known to use base addresses 0x810 and 0x820.
+If the scx200_acb driver is built into the kernel, add the following
+parameter to your boot command line:
+  scx200_acb.base=0x810,0x820
+If the scx200_acb driver is built as a module, add the following line to
+the file /etc/modprobe.conf instead:
+  options scx200_acb base=0x810,0x820

Documentation/ia64/aliasing.txt

@@ -0,0 +1,208 @@
+	         MEMORY ATTRIBUTE ALIASING ON IA-64
+
+			   Bjorn Helgaas
+		       <bjorn.helgaas@hp.com>
+			    May 4, 2006
+
+
+MEMORY ATTRIBUTES
+
+    Itanium supports several attributes for virtual memory references.
+    The attribute is part of the virtual translation, i.e., it is
+    contained in the TLB entry.  The ones of most interest to the Linux
+    kernel are:
+
+	WB		Write-back (cacheable)
+	UC		Uncacheable
+	WC		Write-coalescing
+
+    System memory typically uses the WB attribute.  The UC attribute is
+    used for memory-mapped I/O devices.  The WC attribute is uncacheable
+    like UC is, but writes may be delayed and combined to increase
+    performance for things like frame buffers.
+
+    The Itanium architecture requires that we avoid accessing the same
+    page with both a cacheable mapping and an uncacheable mapping[1].
+
+    The design of the chipset determines which attributes are supported
+    on which regions of the address space.  For example, some chipsets
+    support either WB or UC access to main memory, while others support
+    only WB access.
+
+MEMORY MAP
+
+    Platform firmware describes the physical memory map and the
+    supported attributes for each region.  At boot-time, the kernel uses
+    the EFI GetMemoryMap() interface.  ACPI can also describe memory
+    devices and the attributes they support, but Linux/ia64 currently
+    doesn't use this information.
+
+    The kernel uses the efi_memmap table returned from GetMemoryMap() to
+    learn the attributes supported by each region of physical address
+    space.  Unfortunately, this table does not completely describe the
+    address space because some machines omit some or all of the MMIO
+    regions from the map.
+
+    The kernel maintains another table, kern_memmap, which describes the
+    memory Linux is actually using and the attribute for each region.
+    This contains only system memory; it does not contain MMIO space.
+
+    The kern_memmap table typically contains only a subset of the system
+    memory described by the efi_memmap.  Linux/ia64 can't use all memory
+    in the system because of constraints imposed by the identity mapping
+    scheme.
+
+    The efi_memmap table is preserved unmodified because the original
+    boot-time information is required for kexec.
+
+KERNEL IDENTITY MAPPINGS
+
+    Linux/ia64 identity mappings are done with large pages, currently
+    either 16MB or 64MB, referred to as "granules."  Cacheable mappings
+    are speculative[2], so the processor can read any location in the
+    page at any time, independent of the programmer's intentions.  This
+    means that to avoid attribute aliasing, Linux can create a cacheable
+    identity mapping only when the entire granule supports cacheable
+    access.
+
+    Therefore, kern_memmap contains only full granule-sized regions that
+    can referenced safely by an identity mapping.
+
+    Uncacheable mappings are not speculative, so the processor will
+    generate UC accesses only to locations explicitly referenced by
+    software.  This allows UC identity mappings to cover granules that
+    are only partially populated, or populated with a combination of UC
+    and WB regions.
+
+USER MAPPINGS
+
+    User mappings are typically done with 16K or 64K pages.  The smaller
+    page size allows more flexibility because only 16K or 64K has to be
+    homogeneous with respect to memory attributes.
+
+POTENTIAL ATTRIBUTE ALIASING CASES
+
+    There are several ways the kernel creates new mappings:
+
+    mmap of /dev/mem
+
+	This uses remap_pfn_range(), which creates user mappings.  These
+	mappings may be either WB or UC.  If the region being mapped
+	happens to be in kern_memmap, meaning that it may also be mapped
+	by a kernel identity mapping, the user mapping must use the same
+	attribute as the kernel mapping.
+
+	If the region is not in kern_memmap, the user mapping should use
+	an attribute reported as being supported in the EFI memory map.
+
+	Since the EFI memory map does not describe MMIO on some
+	machines, this should use an uncacheable mapping as a fallback.
+
+    mmap of /sys/class/pci_bus/.../legacy_mem
+
+	This is very similar to mmap of /dev/mem, except that legacy_mem
+	only allows mmap of the one megabyte "legacy MMIO" area for a
+	specific PCI bus.  Typically this is the first megabyte of
+	physical address space, but it may be different on machines with
+	several VGA devices.
+
+	"X" uses this to access VGA frame buffers.  Using legacy_mem
+	rather than /dev/mem allows multiple instances of X to talk to
+	different VGA cards.
+
+	The /dev/mem mmap constraints apply.
+
+	However, since this is for mapping legacy MMIO space, WB access
+	does not make sense.  This matters on machines without legacy
+	VGA support: these machines may have WB memory for the entire
+	first megabyte (or even the entire first granule).
+
+	On these machines, we could mmap legacy_mem as WB, which would
+	be safe in terms of attribute aliasing, but X has no way of
+	knowing that it is accessing regular memory, not a frame buffer,
+	so the kernel should fail the mmap rather than doing it with WB.
+
+    read/write of /dev/mem
+
+	This uses copy_from_user(), which implicitly uses a kernel
+	identity mapping.  This is obviously safe for things in
+	kern_memmap.
+
+	There may be corner cases of things that are not in kern_memmap,
+	but could be accessed this way.  For example, registers in MMIO
+	space are not in kern_memmap, but could be accessed with a UC
+	mapping.  This would not cause attribute aliasing.  But
+	registers typically can be accessed only with four-byte or
+	eight-byte accesses, and the copy_from_user() path doesn't allow
+	any control over the access size, so this would be dangerous.
+
+    ioremap()
+
+	This returns a kernel identity mapping for use inside the
+	kernel.
+
+	If the region is in kern_memmap, we should use the attribute
+	specified there.  Otherwise, if the EFI memory map reports that
+	the entire granule supports WB, we should use that (granules
+	that are partially reserved or occupied by firmware do not appear
+	in kern_memmap).  Otherwise, we should use a UC mapping.
+
+PAST PROBLEM CASES
+
+    mmap of various MMIO regions from /dev/mem by "X" on Intel platforms
+
+      The EFI memory map may not report these MMIO regions.
+
+      These must be allowed so that X will work.  This means that
+      when the EFI memory map is incomplete, every /dev/mem mmap must
+      succeed.  It may create either WB or UC user mappings, depending
+      on whether the region is in kern_memmap or the EFI memory map.
+
+    mmap of 0x0-0xA0000 /dev/mem by "hwinfo" on HP sx1000 with VGA enabled
+
+      See https://bugzilla.novell.com/show_bug.cgi?id=140858.
+
+      The EFI memory map reports the following attributes:
+        0x00000-0x9FFFF WB only
+        0xA0000-0xBFFFF UC only (VGA frame buffer)
+        0xC0000-0xFFFFF WB only
+
+      This mmap is done with user pages, not kernel identity mappings,
+      so it is safe to use WB mappings.
+
+      The kernel VGA driver may ioremap the VGA frame buffer at 0xA0000,
+      which will use a granule-sized UC mapping covering 0-0xFFFFF.  This
+      granule covers some WB-only memory, but since UC is non-speculative,
+      the processor will never generate an uncacheable reference to the
+      WB-only areas unless the driver explicitly touches them.
+
+    mmap of 0x0-0xFFFFF legacy_mem by "X"
+
+      If the EFI memory map reports this entire range as WB, there
+      is no VGA MMIO hole, and the mmap should fail or be done with
+      a WB mapping.
+
+      There's no easy way for X to determine whether the 0xA0000-0xBFFFF
+      region is a frame buffer or just memory, so I think it's best to
+      just fail this mmap request rather than using a WB mapping.  As
+      far as I know, there's no need to map legacy_mem with WB
+      mappings.
+
+      Otherwise, a UC mapping of the entire region is probably safe.
+      The VGA hole means the region will not be in kern_memmap.  The
+      HP sx1000 chipset doesn't support UC access to the memory surrounding
+      the VGA hole, but X doesn't need that area anyway and should not
+      reference it.
+
+    mmap of 0xA0000-0xBFFFF legacy_mem by "X" on HP sx1000 with VGA disabled
+
+      The EFI memory map reports the following attributes:
+        0x00000-0xFFFFF WB only (no VGA MMIO hole)
+
+      This is a special case of the previous case, and the mmap should
+      fail for the same reason as above.
+
+NOTES
+
+    [1] SDM rev 2.2, vol 2, sec 4.4.1.
+    [2] SDM rev 2.2, vol 2, sec 4.4.6.

Documentation/infiniband/ipoib.txt

@@ -1,10 +1,10 @@
 IP OVER INFINIBAND
 
   The ib_ipoib driver is an implementation of the IP over InfiniBand
-  protocol as specified by the latest Internet-Drafts issued by the
-  IETF ipoib working group.  It is a "native" implementation in the
-  sense of setting the interface type to ARPHRD_INFINIBAND and the
-  hardware address length to 20 (earlier proprietary implementations
+  protocol as specified by RFC 4391 and 4392, issued by the IETF ipoib
+  working group.  It is a "native" implementation in the sense of
+  setting the interface type to ARPHRD_INFINIBAND and the hardware
+  address length to 20 (earlier proprietary implementations
   masqueraded to the kernel as ethernet interfaces).
 
 Partitions and P_Keys
@@ -53,3 +53,7 @@ References
 
   IETF IP over InfiniBand (ipoib) Working Group
     http://ietf.org/html.charters/ipoib-charter.html
+  Transmission of IP over InfiniBand (IPoIB) (RFC 4391)
+    http://ietf.org/rfc/rfc4391.txt 
+  IP over InfiniBand (IPoIB) Architecture (RFC 4392)
+    http://ietf.org/rfc/rfc4392.txt 

Documentation/initrd.txt

@@ -67,8 +67,7 @@ initrd adds the following new options:
     as the last process has closed it, all data is freed and /dev/initrd
     can't be opened anymore.
 
-  root=/dev/ram0   (without devfs)
-  root=/dev/rd/0   (with devfs)
+  root=/dev/ram0
 
     initrd is mounted as root, and the normal boot procedure is followed,
     with the RAM disk still mounted as root.
@@ -90,8 +89,7 @@ you're building an install floppy), the root file system creation
 procedure should create the /initrd directory.
 
 If initrd will not be mounted in some cases, its content is still
-accessible if the following device has been created (note that this
-does not work if using devfs):
+accessible if the following device has been created:
 
 # mknod /dev/initrd b 1 250 
 # chmod 400 /dev/initrd
@@ -119,8 +117,7 @@ We'll describe the loopback device method:
     (if space is critical, you may want to use the Minix FS instead of Ext2)
  3) mount the file system, e.g.
     # mount -t ext2 -o loop initrd /mnt
- 4) create the console device (not necessary if using devfs, but it can't
-    hurt to do it anyway):
+ 4) create the console device:
     # mkdir /mnt/dev
     # mknod /mnt/dev/console c 5 1
  5) copy all the files that are needed to properly use the initrd
@@ -152,12 +149,7 @@ have to be given:
 
   root=/dev/ram0 init=/linuxrc rw
 
-if not using devfs, or
-
-  root=/dev/rd/0 init=/linuxrc rw
-
-if using devfs. (rw is only necessary if writing to the initrd file
-system.)
+(rw is only necessary if writing to the initrd file system.)
 
 With LOADLIN, you simply execute
 
@@ -217,9 +209,9 @@ following command:
 # exec chroot . what-follows <dev/console >dev/console 2>&1
 
 Where what-follows is a program under the new root, e.g. /sbin/init
-If the new root file system will be used with devfs and has no valid
-/dev directory, devfs must be mounted before invoking chroot in order to
-provide /dev/console.
+If the new root file system will be used with udev and has no valid
+/dev directory, udev must be initialized before invoking chroot in order
+to provide /dev/console.
 
 Note: implementation details of pivot_root may change with time. In order
 to ensure compatibility, the following points should be observed:
@@ -236,7 +228,7 @@ Now, the initrd can be unmounted and the memory allocated by the RAM
 disk can be freed:
 
 # umount /initrd
-# blockdev --flushbufs /dev/ram0    # /dev/rd/0 if using devfs
+# blockdev --flushbufs /dev/ram0
 
 It is also possible to use initrd with an NFS-mounted root, see the
 pivot_root(8) man page for details.

Documentation/ioctl-number.txt

@@ -85,7 +85,9 @@ Code	Seq#	Include File		Comments
 					<mailto:maassen@uni-freiburg.de>
 'C'	all	linux/soundcard.h
 'D'	all	asm-s390/dasd.h
+'E'	all	linux/input.h
 'F'	all	linux/fb.h
+'H'	all	linux/hiddev.h
 'I'	all	linux/isdn.h
 'J'	00-1F	drivers/scsi/gdth_ioctl.h
 'K'	all	linux/kd.h
@@ -117,7 +119,6 @@ Code	Seq#	Include File		Comments
 'c'	00-7F	linux/comstats.h	conflict!
 'c'	00-7F	linux/coda.h		conflict!
 'd'	00-FF	linux/char/drm/drm/h	conflict!
-'d'	00-1F	linux/devfs_fs.h	conflict!
 'd'	00-DF	linux/video_decoder.h	conflict!
 'd'	F0-FF	linux/digi1.h
 'e'	all	linux/digi1.h		conflict!

Documentation/irqflags-tracing.txt

@@ -0,0 +1,57 @@
+IRQ-flags state tracing
+
+started by Ingo Molnar <mingo@redhat.com>
+
+the "irq-flags tracing" feature "traces" hardirq and softirq state, in
+that it gives interested subsystems an opportunity to be notified of
+every hardirqs-off/hardirqs-on, softirqs-off/softirqs-on event that
+happens in the kernel.
+
+CONFIG_TRACE_IRQFLAGS_SUPPORT is needed for CONFIG_PROVE_SPIN_LOCKING
+and CONFIG_PROVE_RW_LOCKING to be offered by the generic lock debugging
+code. Otherwise only CONFIG_PROVE_MUTEX_LOCKING and
+CONFIG_PROVE_RWSEM_LOCKING will be offered on an architecture - these
+are locking APIs that are not used in IRQ context. (the one exception
+for rwsems is worked around)
+
+architecture support for this is certainly not in the "trivial"
+category, because lots of lowlevel assembly code deal with irq-flags
+state changes. But an architecture can be irq-flags-tracing enabled in a
+rather straightforward and risk-free manner.
+
+Architectures that want to support this need to do a couple of
+code-organizational changes first:
+
+- move their irq-flags manipulation code from their asm/system.h header
+  to asm/irqflags.h
+
+- rename local_irq_disable()/etc to raw_local_irq_disable()/etc. so that
+  the linux/irqflags.h code can inject callbacks and can construct the
+  real local_irq_disable()/etc APIs.
+
+- add and enable TRACE_IRQFLAGS_SUPPORT in their arch level Kconfig file
+
+and then a couple of functional changes are needed as well to implement
+irq-flags-tracing support:
+
+- in lowlevel entry code add (build-conditional) calls to the
+  trace_hardirqs_off()/trace_hardirqs_on() functions. The lock validator
+  closely guards whether the 'real' irq-flags matches the 'virtual'
+  irq-flags state, and complains loudly (and turns itself off) if the
+  two do not match. Usually most of the time for arch support for
+  irq-flags-tracing is spent in this state: look at the lockdep
+  complaint, try to figure out the assembly code we did not cover yet,
+  fix and repeat. Once the system has booted up and works without a
+  lockdep complaint in the irq-flags-tracing functions arch support is
+  complete.
+- if the architecture has non-maskable interrupts then those need to be
+  excluded from the irq-tracing [and lock validation] mechanism via
+  lockdep_off()/lockdep_on().
+
+in general there is no risk from having an incomplete irq-flags-tracing
+implementation in an architecture: lockdep will detect that and will
+turn itself off. I.e. the lock validator will still be reliable. There
+should be no crashes due to irq-tracing bugs. (except if the assembly
+changes break other code by modifying conditions or registers that
+shouldnt be)
+

Documentation/isdn/README.gigaset

@@ -124,7 +124,8 @@ GigaSet 307x Device Driver
 
      You can use some configuration tool of your distribution to configure this
      "modem" or configure pppd/wvdial manually. There are some example ppp
-     configuration files and chat scripts in the gigaset-VERSION/ppp directory.
+     configuration files and chat scripts in the gigaset-VERSION/ppp directory
+     in the driver packages from http://sourceforge.net/projects/gigaset307x/.
      Please note that the USB drivers are not able to change the state of the
      control lines (the M105 driver can be configured to use some undocumented
      control requests, if you really need the control lines, though). This means
@@ -164,8 +165,8 @@ GigaSet 307x Device Driver
 
      If you want both of these at once, you are out of luck.
 
-     You can also use /sys/module/<name>/parameters/cidmode for changing
-     the CID mode setting (<name> is usb_gigaset or bas_gigaset).
+     You can also use /sys/class/tty/ttyGxy/cidmode for changing the CID mode
+     setting (ttyGxy is ttyGU0 or ttyGB0).
 
 
 3.   Troubleshooting

Documentation/kbuild/makefiles.txt

@@ -1123,6 +1123,14 @@ The top Makefile exports the following variables:
 	$(INSTALL_MOD_PATH)/lib/modules/$(KERNELRELEASE).  The user may
 	override this value on the command line if desired.
 
+    INSTALL_MOD_STRIP
+
+	If this variable is specified, will cause modules to be stripped
+	after they are installed.  If INSTALL_MOD_STRIP is '1', then the
+	default option --strip-debug will be used.  Otherwise,
+	INSTALL_MOD_STRIP will used as the option(s) to the strip command.
+
+
 === 8 Makefile language
 
 The kernel Makefiles are designed to run with GNU Make.  The Makefiles

Documentation/kdump/gdbmacros.txt

@@ -175,7 +175,7 @@ end
 document trapinfo
 	Run info threads and lookup pid of thread #1
 	'trapinfo <pid>' will tell you by which trap & possibly
-	addresthe kernel paniced.
+	address the kernel panicked.
 end
 
 

Documentation/kdump/kdump.txt

@@ -1,155 +1,325 @@
-Documentation for kdump - the kexec-based crash dumping solution
+================================================================
+Documentation for Kdump - The kexec-based Crash Dumping Solution
 ================================================================
 
-DESIGN
-======
+This document includes overview, setup and installation, and analysis
+information.
 
-Kdump uses kexec to reboot to a second kernel whenever a dump needs to be
-taken. This second kernel is booted with very little memory. The first kernel
-reserves the section of memory that the second kernel uses. This ensures that
-on-going DMA from the first kernel does not corrupt the second kernel.
+Overview
+========
 
-All the necessary information about Core image is encoded in ELF format and
-stored in reserved area of memory before crash. Physical address of start of
-ELF header is passed to new kernel through command line parameter elfcorehdr=.
+Kdump uses kexec to quickly boot to a dump-capture kernel whenever a
+dump of the system kernel's memory needs to be taken (for example, when
+the system panics). The system kernel's memory image is preserved across
+the reboot and is accessible to the dump-capture kernel.
 
-On i386, the first 640 KB of physical memory is needed to boot, irrespective
-of where the kernel loads. Hence, this region is backed up by kexec just before
-rebooting into the new kernel.
+You can use common Linux commands, such as cp and scp, to copy the
+memory image to a dump file on the local disk, or across the network to
+a remote system.
 
-In the second kernel, "old memory" can be accessed in two ways.
+Kdump and kexec are currently supported on the x86, x86_64, and ppc64
+architectures.
 
-- The first one is through a /dev/oldmem device interface. A capture utility
-  can read the device file and write out the memory in raw format. This is raw
-  dump of memory and analysis/capture tool should be intelligent enough to
-  determine where to look for the right information. ELF headers (elfcorehdr=)
-  can become handy here.
+When the system kernel boots, it reserves a small section of memory for
+the dump-capture kernel. This ensures that ongoing Direct Memory Access
+(DMA) from the system kernel does not corrupt the dump-capture kernel.
+The kexec -p command loads the dump-capture kernel into this reserved
+memory.
 
-- The second interface is through /proc/vmcore. This exports the dump as an ELF
-  format file which can be written out using any file copy command
-  (cp, scp, etc). Further, gdb can be used to perform limited debugging on
-  the dump file. This method ensures methods ensure that there is correct
-  ordering of the dump pages (corresponding to the first 640 KB that has been
-  relocated).
+On x86 machines, the first 640 KB of physical memory is needed to boot,
+regardless of where the kernel loads. Therefore, kexec backs up this
+region just before rebooting into the dump-capture kernel.
 
-SETUP
-=====
+All of the necessary information about the system kernel's core image is
+encoded in the ELF format, and stored in a reserved area of memory
+before a crash. The physical address of the start of the ELF header is
+passed to the dump-capture kernel through the elfcorehdr= boot
+parameter.
 
-1) Download the upstream kexec-tools userspace package from
-   http://www.xmission.com/~ebiederm/files/kexec/kexec-tools-1.101.tar.gz.
+With the dump-capture kernel, you can access the memory image, or "old
+memory," in two ways:
 
-   Apply the latest consolidated kdump patch on top of kexec-tools-1.101
-   from http://lse.sourceforge.net/kdump/. This arrangment has been made
-   till all the userspace patches supporting kdump are integrated with
-   upstream kexec-tools userspace.
+- Through a /dev/oldmem device interface. A capture utility can read the
+  device file and write out the memory in raw format. This is a raw dump
+  of memory. Analysis and capture tools must be intelligent enough to
+  determine where to look for the right information.
 
-2) Download and build the appropriate (2.6.13-rc1 onwards) vanilla kernels.
-   Two kernels need to be built in order to get this feature working.
-   Following are the steps to properly configure the two kernels specific
-   to kexec and kdump features:
-
-  A) First kernel or regular kernel:
-  ----------------------------------
-   a) Enable "kexec system call" feature (in Processor type and features).
-      CONFIG_KEXEC=y
-   b) Enable "sysfs file system support" (in Pseudo filesystems).
-      CONFIG_SYSFS=y
-   c) make
-   d) Boot into first kernel with the command line parameter "crashkernel=Y@X".
-      Use appropriate values for X and Y. Y denotes how much memory to reserve
-      for the second kernel, and X denotes at what physical address the
-      reserved memory section starts. For example: "crashkernel=64M@16M".
+- Through /proc/vmcore. This exports the dump as an ELF-format file that
+  you can write out using file copy commands such as cp or scp. Further,
+  you can use analysis tools such as the GNU Debugger (GDB) and the Crash
+  tool to debug the dump file. This method ensures that the dump pages are
+  correctly ordered.
 
 
-  B) Second kernel or dump capture kernel:
-  ---------------------------------------
-   a) For i386 architecture enable Highmem support
-      CONFIG_HIGHMEM=y
-   b) Enable "kernel crash dumps" feature (under "Processor type and features")
-      CONFIG_CRASH_DUMP=y
-   c) Make sure a suitable value for "Physical address where the kernel is
-      loaded" (under "Processor type and features"). By default this value
-      is 0x1000000 (16MB) and it should be same as X (See option d above),
-      e.g., 16 MB or 0x1000000.
-      CONFIG_PHYSICAL_START=0x1000000
-   d) Enable "/proc/vmcore support" (Optional, under "Pseudo filesystems").
-      CONFIG_PROC_VMCORE=y
+Setup and Installation
+======================
 
-3) After booting to regular kernel or first kernel, load the second kernel
-   using the following command:
+Install kexec-tools and the Kdump patch
+---------------------------------------
 
-   kexec -p <second-kernel> --args-linux --elf32-core-headers
-   --append="root=<root-dev> init 1 irqpoll maxcpus=1"
+1) Login as the root user.
 
-   Notes:
-   ======
-     i) <second-kernel> has to be a vmlinux image ie uncompressed elf image.
-        bzImage will not work, as of now.
-    ii) --args-linux has to be speicfied as if kexec it loading an elf image,
-        it needs to know that the arguments supplied are of linux type.
-   iii) By default ELF headers are stored in ELF64 format to support systems
-        with more than 4GB memory. Option --elf32-core-headers forces generation
-        of ELF32 headers. The reason for this option being, as of now gdb can
-        not open vmcore file with ELF64 headers on a 32 bit systems. So ELF32
-        headers can be used if one has non-PAE systems and hence memory less
-        than 4GB.
-    iv) Specify "irqpoll" as command line parameter. This reduces driver
-         initialization failures in second kernel due to shared interrupts.
-     v) <root-dev> needs to be specified in a format corresponding to the root
-        device name in the output of mount command.
-    vi) If you have built the drivers required to mount root file system as
-        modules in <second-kernel>, then, specify
-        --initrd=<initrd-for-second-kernel>.
-   vii) Specify maxcpus=1 as, if during first kernel run, if panic happens on
-        non-boot cpus, second kernel doesn't seem to be boot up all the cpus.
-        The other option is to always built the second kernel without SMP
-        support ie CONFIG_SMP=n
+2) Download the kexec-tools user-space package from the following URL:
 
-4) After successfully loading the second kernel as above, if a panic occurs
-   system reboots into the second kernel. A module can be written to force
-   the panic or "ALT-SysRq-c" can be used initiate a crash dump for testing
-   purposes.
+   http://www.xmission.com/~ebiederm/files/kexec/kexec-tools-1.101.tar.gz
 
-5) Once the second kernel has booted, write out the dump file using
+3) Unpack the tarball with the tar command, as follows:
+
+   tar xvpzf kexec-tools-1.101.tar.gz
+
+4) Download the latest consolidated Kdump patch from the following URL:
+
+   http://lse.sourceforge.net/kdump/
+
+   (This location is being used until all the user-space Kdump patches
+   are integrated with the kexec-tools package.)
+
+5) Change to the kexec-tools-1.101 directory, as follows:
+
+   cd kexec-tools-1.101
+
+6) Apply the consolidated patch to the kexec-tools-1.101 source tree
+   with the patch command, as follows. (Modify the path to the downloaded
+   patch as necessary.)
+
+   patch -p1 < /path-to-kdump-patch/kexec-tools-1.101-kdump.patch
+
+7) Configure the package, as follows:
+
+   ./configure
+
+8) Compile the package, as follows:
+
+   make
+
+9) Install the package, as follows:
+
+   make install
+
+
+Download and build the system and dump-capture kernels
+------------------------------------------------------
+
+Download the mainline (vanilla) kernel source code (2.6.13-rc1 or newer)
+from http://www.kernel.org. Two kernels must be built: a system kernel
+and a dump-capture kernel. Use the following steps to configure these
+kernels with the necessary kexec and Kdump features:
+
+System kernel
+-------------
+
+1) Enable "kexec system call" in "Processor type and features."
+
+   CONFIG_KEXEC=y
+
+2) Enable "sysfs file system support" in "Filesystem" -> "Pseudo
+   filesystems." This is usually enabled by default.
+
+   CONFIG_SYSFS=y
+
+   Note that "sysfs file system support" might not appear in the "Pseudo
+   filesystems" menu if "Configure standard kernel features (for small
+   systems)" is not enabled in "General Setup." In this case, check the
+   .config file itself to ensure that sysfs is turned on, as follows:
+
+   grep 'CONFIG_SYSFS' .config
+
+3) Enable "Compile the kernel with debug info" in "Kernel hacking."
+
+   CONFIG_DEBUG_INFO=Y
+
+   This causes the kernel to be built with debug symbols. The dump
+   analysis tools require a vmlinux with debug symbols in order to read
+   and analyze a dump file.
+
+4) Make and install the kernel and its modules. Update the boot loader
+   (such as grub, yaboot, or lilo) configuration files as necessary.
+
+5) Boot the system kernel with the boot parameter "crashkernel=Y@X",
+   where Y specifies how much memory to reserve for the dump-capture kernel
+   and X specifies the beginning of this reserved memory. For example,
+   "crashkernel=64M@16M" tells the system kernel to reserve 64 MB of memory
+   starting at physical address 0x01000000 for the dump-capture kernel.
+
+   On x86 and x86_64, use "crashkernel=64M@16M".
+
+   On ppc64, use "crashkernel=128M@32M".
+
+
+The dump-capture kernel
+-----------------------
+
+1) Under "General setup," append "-kdump" to the current string in
+   "Local version."
+
+2) On x86, enable high memory support under "Processor type and
+   features":
+
+   CONFIG_HIGHMEM64G=y
+   or
+   CONFIG_HIGHMEM4G
+
+3) On x86 and x86_64, disable symmetric multi-processing support
+   under "Processor type and features":
+
+   CONFIG_SMP=n
+   (If CONFIG_SMP=y, then specify maxcpus=1 on the kernel command line
+   when loading the dump-capture kernel, see section "Load the Dump-capture
+   Kernel".)
+
+4) On ppc64, disable NUMA support and enable EMBEDDED support:
+
+   CONFIG_NUMA=n
+   CONFIG_EMBEDDED=y
+   CONFIG_EEH=N for the dump-capture kernel
+
+5) Enable "kernel crash dumps" support under "Processor type and
+   features":
+
+   CONFIG_CRASH_DUMP=y
+
+6) Use a suitable value for "Physical address where the kernel is
+   loaded" (under "Processor type and features"). This only appears when
+   "kernel crash dumps" is enabled. By default this value is 0x1000000
+   (16MB). It should be the same as X in the "crashkernel=Y@X" boot
+   parameter discussed above.
+
+   On x86 and x86_64, use "CONFIG_PHYSICAL_START=0x1000000".
+
+   On ppc64 the value is automatically set at 32MB when
+   CONFIG_CRASH_DUMP is set.
+
+6) Optionally enable "/proc/vmcore support" under "Filesystems" ->
+   "Pseudo filesystems".
+
+   CONFIG_PROC_VMCORE=y
+   (CONFIG_PROC_VMCORE is set by default when CONFIG_CRASH_DUMP is selected.)
+
+7) Make and install the kernel and its modules. DO NOT add this kernel
+   to the boot loader configuration files.
+
+
+Load the Dump-capture Kernel
+============================
+
+After booting to the system kernel, load the dump-capture kernel using
+the following command:
+
+   kexec -p <dump-capture-kernel> \
+   --initrd=<initrd-for-dump-capture-kernel> --args-linux \
+   --append="root=<root-dev> init 1 irqpoll"
+
+
+Notes on loading the dump-capture kernel:
+
+* <dump-capture-kernel> must be a vmlinux image (that is, an
+  uncompressed ELF image). bzImage does not work at this time.
+
+* By default, the ELF headers are stored in ELF64 format to support
+  systems with more than 4GB memory. The --elf32-core-headers option can
+  be used to force the generation of ELF32 headers. This is necessary
+  because GDB currently cannot open vmcore files with ELF64 headers on
+  32-bit systems. ELF32 headers can be used on non-PAE systems (that is,
+  less than 4GB of memory).
+
+* The "irqpoll" boot parameter reduces driver initialization failures
+  due to shared interrupts in the dump-capture kernel.
+
+* You must specify <root-dev> in the format corresponding to the root
+  device name in the output of mount command.
+
+* "init 1" boots the dump-capture kernel into single-user mode without
+  networking. If you want networking, use "init 3."
+
+
+Kernel Panic
+============
+
+After successfully loading the dump-capture kernel as previously
+described, the system will reboot into the dump-capture kernel if a
+system crash is triggered.  Trigger points are located in panic(),
+die(), die_nmi() and in the sysrq handler (ALT-SysRq-c).
+
+The following conditions will execute a crash trigger point:
+
+If a hard lockup is detected and "NMI watchdog" is configured, the system
+will boot into the dump-capture kernel ( die_nmi() ).
+
+If die() is called, and it happens to be a thread with pid 0 or 1, or die()
+is called inside interrupt context or die() is called and panic_on_oops is set,
+the system will boot into the dump-capture kernel.
+
+On powererpc systems when a soft-reset is generated, die() is called by all cpus and the system system will boot into the dump-capture kernel.
+
+For testing purposes, you can trigger a crash by using "ALT-SysRq-c",
+"echo c > /proc/sysrq-trigger or write a module to force the panic.
+
+Write Out the Dump File
+=======================
+
+After the dump-capture kernel is booted, write out the dump file with
+the following command:
 
    cp /proc/vmcore <dump-file>
 
-   Dump memory can also be accessed as a /dev/oldmem device for a linear/raw
-   view.  To create the device, type:
+You can also access dumped memory as a /dev/oldmem device for a linear
+and raw view. To create the device, use the following command:
 
-   mknod /dev/oldmem c 1 12
+    mknod /dev/oldmem c 1 12
 
-   Use "dd" with suitable options for count, bs and skip to access specific
-   portions of the dump.
+Use the dd command with suitable options for count, bs, and skip to
+access specific portions of the dump.
 
-   Entire memory:  dd if=/dev/oldmem of=oldmem.001
+To see the entire memory, use the following command:
+
+   dd if=/dev/oldmem of=oldmem.001
 
 
-ANALYSIS
+Analysis
 ========
-Limited analysis can be done using gdb on the dump file copied out of
-/proc/vmcore. Use vmlinux built with -g and run
 
-  gdb vmlinux <dump-file>
+Before analyzing the dump image, you should reboot into a stable kernel.
 
-Stack trace for the task on processor 0, register display, memory display
-work fine.
+You can do limited analysis using GDB on the dump file copied out of
+/proc/vmcore. Use the debug vmlinux built with -g and run the following
+command:
 
-Note: gdb cannot analyse core files generated in ELF64 format for i386.
+   gdb vmlinux <dump-file>
 
-Latest "crash" (crash-4.0-2.18) as available on Dave Anderson's site
-http://people.redhat.com/~anderson/ works well with kdump format.
+Stack trace for the task on processor 0, register display, and memory
+display work fine.
+
+Note: GDB cannot analyze core files generated in ELF64 format for x86.
+On systems with a maximum of 4GB of memory, you can generate
+ELF32-format headers using the --elf32-core-headers kernel option on the
+dump kernel.
+
+You can also use the Crash utility to analyze dump files in Kdump
+format. Crash is available on Dave Anderson's site at the following URL:
+
+   http://people.redhat.com/~anderson/
 
 
-TODO
-====
-1) Provide a kernel pages filtering mechanism so that core file size is not
-   insane on systems having huge memory banks.
-2) Relocatable kernel can help in maintaining multiple kernels for crashdump
-   and same kernel as the first kernel can be used to capture the dump.
+To Do
+=====
+
+1) Provide a kernel pages filtering mechanism, so core file size is not
+   extreme on systems with huge memory banks.
+
+2) Relocatable kernel can help in maintaining multiple kernels for
+   crash_dump, and the same kernel as the system kernel can be used to
+   capture the dump.
 
 
-CONTACT
+Contact
 =======
+
 Vivek Goyal (vgoyal@in.ibm.com)
 Maneesh Soni (maneesh@in.ibm.com)
+
+
+Trademark
+=========
+
+Linux is a trademark of Linus Torvalds in the United States, other
+countries, or both.

Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt

@@ -35,7 +35,6 @@ parameter is applicable:
 	APM	Advanced Power Management support is enabled.
 	AX25	Appropriate AX.25 support is enabled.
 	CD	Appropriate CD support is enabled.
-	DEVFS	devfs support is enabled.
 	DRM	Direct Rendering Management support is enabled.
 	EDD	BIOS Enhanced Disk Drive Services (EDD) is enabled
 	EFI	EFI Partitioning (GPT) is enabled
@@ -61,6 +60,7 @@ parameter is applicable:
 	MTD	MTD support is enabled.
 	NET	Appropriate network support is enabled.
 	NUMA	NUMA support is enabled.
+	GENERIC_TIME The generic timeofday code is enabled.
 	NFS	Appropriate NFS support is enabled.
 	OSS	OSS sound support is enabled.
 	PARIDE	The ParIDE subsystem is enabled.
@@ -147,6 +147,9 @@ running once the system is up.
 	acpi_irq_isa=	[HW,ACPI] If irq_balance, mark listed IRQs used by ISA
 			Format: <irq>,<irq>...
 
+	acpi_os_name=	[HW,ACPI] Tell ACPI BIOS the name of the OS
+			Format: To spoof as Windows 98: ="Microsoft Windows"
+
 	acpi_osi=	[HW,ACPI] empty param disables _OSI
 
 	acpi_serialize	[HW,ACPI] force serialization of AML methods
@@ -176,6 +179,11 @@ running once the system is up.
 			override platform specific driver.
 			See also Documentation/acpi-hotkey.txt.
 
+	acpi_pm_good	[IA-32,X86-64]
+			Override the pmtimer bug detection: force the kernel
+			to assume that this machine's pmtimer latches its value
+			and always returns good values.
+
 	enable_timer_pin_1 [i386,x86-64]
 			Enable PIN 1 of APIC timer
 			Can be useful to work around chipset bugs
@@ -338,10 +346,11 @@ running once the system is up.
 			Value can be changed at runtime via
 				/selinux/checkreqprot.
 
- 	clock=		[BUGS=IA-32,HW] gettimeofday timesource override.
-			Forces specified timesource (if avaliable) to be used
-			when calculating gettimeofday(). If specicified
-			timesource is not avalible, it defaults to PIT.
+	clock=		[BUGS=IA-32, HW] gettimeofday clocksource override.
+			[Deprecated]
+			Forces specified clocksource (if avaliable) to be used
+			when calculating gettimeofday(). If specified
+			clocksource is not avalible, it defaults to PIT.
 			Format: { pit | tsc | cyclone | pmtmr }
 
 	disable_8254_timer
@@ -426,12 +435,20 @@ running once the system is up.
 
 	debug		[KNL] Enable kernel debugging (events log level).
 
+	debug_locks_verbose=
+			[KNL] verbose self-tests
+			Format=<0|1>
+			Print debugging info while doing the locking API
+			self-tests.
+			We default to 0 (no extra messages), setting it to
+			1 will print _a lot_ more information - normally
+			only useful to kernel developers.
+
 	decnet=		[HW,NET]
 			Format: <area>[,<node>]
 			See also Documentation/networking/decnet.txt.
 
-	devfs=		[DEVFS]
-			See Documentation/filesystems/devfs/boot-options.
+	delayacct	[KNL] Enable per-task delay accounting
 
 	dhash_entries=	[KNL]
 			Set number of hash buckets for dentry cache.
@@ -1402,6 +1419,15 @@ running once the system is up.
 			If enabled at boot time, /selinux/disable can be used
 			later to disable prior to initial policy load.
 
+	selinux_compat_net =
+			[SELINUX] Set initial selinux_compat_net flag value.
+                        Format: { "0" | "1" }
+                        0 -- use new secmark-based packet controls
+                        1 -- use legacy packet controls
+                        Default value is 0 (preferred).
+                        Value can be changed at runtime via
+                        /selinux/compat_net.
+
 	serialnumber	[BUGS=IA-32]
 
 	sg_def_reserved_size=	[SCSI]
@@ -1605,6 +1631,10 @@ running once the system is up.
 
 	time		Show timing data prefixed to each printk message line
 
+	clocksource=	[GENERIC_TIME] Override the default clocksource
+			Override the default clocksource and use the clocksource
+			with the name specified.
+
 	tipar.timeout=	[HW,PPT]
 			Set communications timeout in tenths of a second
 			(default 15).
@@ -1646,6 +1676,10 @@ running once the system is up.
 	usbhid.mousepoll=
 			[USBHID] The interval which mice are to be polled at.
 
+	vdso=		[IA-32]
+			vdso=1: enable VDSO (default)
+			vdso=0: disable VDSO mapping
+
 	video=		[FB] Frame buffer configuration
 			See Documentation/fb/modedb.txt.
 
@@ -1662,9 +1696,14 @@ running once the system is up.
 			decrease the size and leave more room for directly
 			mapped kernel RAM.
 
-	vmhalt=		[KNL,S390]
+	vmhalt=		[KNL,S390] Perform z/VM CP command after system halt.
+			Format: <command>
 
-	vmpoff=		[KNL,S390]
+	vmpanic=	[KNL,S390] Perform z/VM CP command after kernel panic.
+			Format: <command>
+
+	vmpoff=		[KNL,S390] Perform z/VM CP command after power off.
+			Format: <command>
 
 	waveartist=	[HW,OSS]
 			Format: <io>,<irq>,<dma>,<dma2>

Documentation/keys-request-key.txt

@@ -3,16 +3,23 @@
 			      ===================
 
 The key request service is part of the key retention service (refer to
-Documentation/keys.txt). This document explains more fully how that the
-requesting algorithm works.
+Documentation/keys.txt).  This document explains more fully how the requesting
+algorithm works.
 
 The process starts by either the kernel requesting a service by calling
-request_key():
+request_key*():
 
 	struct key *request_key(const struct key_type *type,
 				const char *description,
 				const char *callout_string);
 
+or:
+
+	struct key *request_key_with_auxdata(const struct key_type *type,
+					     const char *description,
+					     const char *callout_string,
+					     void *aux);
+
 Or by userspace invoking the request_key system call:
 
 	key_serial_t request_key(const char *type,
@@ -20,16 +27,26 @@ Or by userspace invoking the request_key system call:
 				 const char *callout_info,
 				 key_serial_t dest_keyring);
 
-The main difference between the two access points is that the in-kernel
-interface does not need to link the key to a keyring to prevent it from being
-immediately destroyed. The kernel interface returns a pointer directly to the
-key, and it's up to the caller to destroy the key.
+The main difference between the access points is that the in-kernel interface
+does not need to link the key to a keyring to prevent it from being immediately
+destroyed.  The kernel interface returns a pointer directly to the key, and
+it's up to the caller to destroy the key.
+
+The request_key_with_auxdata() call is like the in-kernel request_key() call,
+except that it permits auxiliary data to be passed to the upcaller (the default
+is NULL).  This is only useful for those key types that define their own upcall
+mechanism rather than using /sbin/request-key.
 
 The userspace interface links the key to a keyring associated with the process
 to prevent the key from going away, and returns the serial number of the key to
 the caller.
 
 
+The following example assumes that the key types involved don't define their
+own upcall mechanisms.  If they do, then those should be substituted for the
+forking and execution of /sbin/request-key.
+
+
 ===========
 THE PROCESS
 ===========
@@ -40,8 +57,8 @@ A request proceeds in the following manner:
      interface].
 
  (2) request_key() searches the process's subscribed keyrings to see if there's
-     a suitable key there. If there is, it returns the key. If there isn't, and
-     callout_info is not set, an error is returned. Otherwise the process
+     a suitable key there.  If there is, it returns the key.  If there isn't,
+     and callout_info is not set, an error is returned.  Otherwise the process
      proceeds to the next step.
 
  (3) request_key() sees that A doesn't have the desired key yet, so it creates
@@ -62,7 +79,7 @@ A request proceeds in the following manner:
      instantiation.
 
  (7) The program may want to access another key from A's context (say a
-     Kerberos TGT key). It just requests the appropriate key, and the keyring
+     Kerberos TGT key).  It just requests the appropriate key, and the keyring
      search notes that the session keyring has auth key V in its bottom level.
 
      This will permit it to then search the keyrings of process A with the
@@ -79,10 +96,11 @@ A request proceeds in the following manner:
 (10) The program then exits 0 and request_key() deletes key V and returns key
      U to the caller.
 
-This also extends further. If key W (step 7 above) didn't exist, key W would be
-created uninstantiated, another auth key (X) would be created (as per step 3)
-and another copy of /sbin/request-key spawned (as per step 4); but the context
-specified by auth key X will still be process A, as it was in auth key V.
+This also extends further.  If key W (step 7 above) didn't exist, key W would
+be created uninstantiated, another auth key (X) would be created (as per step
+3) and another copy of /sbin/request-key spawned (as per step 4); but the
+context specified by auth key X will still be process A, as it was in auth key
+V.
 
 This is because process A's keyrings can't simply be attached to
 /sbin/request-key at the appropriate places because (a) execve will discard two
@@ -118,17 +136,17 @@ A search of any particular keyring proceeds in the following fashion:
 
  (2) It considers all the non-keyring keys within that keyring and, if any key
      matches the criteria specified, calls key_permission(SEARCH) on it to see
-     if the key is allowed to be found. If it is, that key is returned; if
+     if the key is allowed to be found.  If it is, that key is returned; if
      not, the search continues, and the error code is retained if of higher
      priority than the one currently set.
 
  (3) It then considers all the keyring-type keys in the keyring it's currently
-     searching. It calls key_permission(SEARCH) on each keyring, and if this
+     searching.  It calls key_permission(SEARCH) on each keyring, and if this
      grants permission, it recurses, executing steps (2) and (3) on that
      keyring.
 
 The process stops immediately a valid key is found with permission granted to
-use it. Any error from a previous match attempt is discarded and the key is
+use it.  Any error from a previous match attempt is discarded and the key is
 returned.
 
 When search_process_keyrings() is invoked, it performs the following searches
@@ -153,7 +171,7 @@ The moment one succeeds, all pending errors are discarded and the found key is
 returned.
 
 Only if all these fail does the whole thing fail with the highest priority
-error. Note that several errors may have come from LSM.
+error.  Note that several errors may have come from LSM.
 
 The error priority is:
 

Documentation/keys.txt

@@ -19,6 +19,7 @@ This document has the following sections:
 	- Key overview
 	- Key service overview
 	- Key access permissions
+	- SELinux support
 	- New procfs files
 	- Userspace system call interface
 	- Kernel services
@@ -232,6 +233,39 @@ For changing the ownership, group ID or permissions mask, being the owner of
 the key or having the sysadmin capability is sufficient.
 
 
+===============
+SELINUX SUPPORT
+===============
+
+The security class "key" has been added to SELinux so that mandatory access
+controls can be applied to keys created within various contexts.  This support
+is preliminary, and is likely to change quite significantly in the near future.
+Currently, all of the basic permissions explained above are provided in SELinux
+as well; SELinux is simply invoked after all basic permission checks have been
+performed.
+
+The value of the file /proc/self/attr/keycreate influences the labeling of
+newly-created keys.  If the contents of that file correspond to an SELinux
+security context, then the key will be assigned that context.  Otherwise, the
+key will be assigned the current context of the task that invoked the key
+creation request.  Tasks must be granted explicit permission to assign a
+particular context to newly-created keys, using the "create" permission in the
+key security class.
+
+The default keyrings associated with users will be labeled with the default
+context of the user if and only if the login programs have been instrumented to
+properly initialize keycreate during the login process.  Otherwise, they will
+be labeled with the context of the login program itself.
+
+Note, however, that the default keyrings associated with the root user are
+labeled with the default kernel context, since they are created early in the
+boot process, before root has a chance to log in.
+
+The keyrings associated with new threads are each labeled with the context of
+their associated thread, and both session and process keyrings are handled
+similarly.
+
+
 ================
 NEW PROCFS FILES
 ================
@@ -241,9 +275,17 @@ about the status of the key service:
 
  (*) /proc/keys
 
-     This lists all the keys on the system, giving information about their
-     type, description and permissions. The payload of the key is not available
-     this way:
+     This lists the keys that are currently viewable by the task reading the
+     file, giving information about their type, description and permissions.
+     It is not possible to view the payload of the key this way, though some
+     information about it may be given.
+
+     The only keys included in the list are those that grant View permission to
+     the reading process whether or not it possesses them.  Note that LSM
+     security checks are still performed, and may further filter out keys that
+     the current process is not authorised to view.
+
+     The contents of the file look like this:
 
 	SERIAL   FLAGS  USAGE EXPY PERM     UID   GID   TYPE      DESCRIPTION: SUMMARY
 	00000001 I-----    39 perm 1f3f0000     0     0 keyring   _uid_ses.0: 1/4
@@ -271,7 +313,7 @@ about the status of the key service:
  (*) /proc/key-users
 
      This file lists the tracking data for each user that has at least one key
-     on the system. Such data includes quota information and statistics:
+     on the system.  Such data includes quota information and statistics:
 
 	[root@andromeda root]# cat /proc/key-users
 	0:     46 45/45 1/100 13/10000
@@ -738,6 +780,17 @@ payload contents" for more information.
     See also Documentation/keys-request-key.txt.
 
 
+(*) To search for a key, passing auxiliary data to the upcaller, call:
+
+	struct key *request_key_with_auxdata(const struct key_type *type,
+					     const char *description,
+					     const char *callout_string,
+					     void *aux);
+
+    This is identical to request_key(), except that the auxiliary data is
+    passed to the key_type->request_key() op if it exists.
+
+
 (*) When it is no longer required, the key should be released using:
 
 	void key_put(struct key *key);
@@ -935,6 +988,16 @@ The structure has a number of fields, some of which are mandatory:
      It is not safe to sleep in this method; the caller may hold spinlocks.
 
 
+ (*) void (*revoke)(struct key *key);
+
+     This method is optional.  It is called to discard part of the payload
+     data upon a key being revoked.  The caller will have the key semaphore
+     write-locked.
+
+     It is safe to sleep in this method, though care should be taken to avoid
+     a deadlock against the key semaphore.
+
+
  (*) void (*destroy)(struct key *key);
 
      This method is optional. It is called to discard the payload data on a key
@@ -979,6 +1042,24 @@ The structure has a number of fields, some of which are mandatory:
      as might happen when the userspace buffer is accessed.
 
 
+ (*) int (*request_key)(struct key *key, struct key *authkey, const char *op,
+			void *aux);
+
+     This method is optional.  If provided, request_key() and
+     request_key_with_auxdata() will invoke this function rather than
+     upcalling to /sbin/request-key to operate upon a key of this type.
+
+     The aux parameter is as passed to request_key_with_auxdata() or is NULL
+     otherwise.  Also passed are the key to be operated upon, the
+     authorisation key for this operation and the operation type (currently
+     only "create").
+
+     This function should return only when the upcall is complete.  Upon return
+     the authorisation key will be revoked, and the target key will be
+     negatively instantiated if it is still uninstantiated.  The error will be
+     returned to the caller of request_key*().
+
+
 ============================
 REQUEST-KEY CALLBACK SERVICE
 ============================

Documentation/lockdep-design.txt

@@ -0,0 +1,197 @@
+Runtime locking correctness validator
+=====================================
+
+started by Ingo Molnar <mingo@redhat.com>
+additions by Arjan van de Ven <arjan@linux.intel.com>
+
+Lock-class
+----------
+
+The basic object the validator operates upon is a 'class' of locks.
+
+A class of locks is a group of locks that are logically the same with
+respect to locking rules, even if the locks may have multiple (possibly
+tens of thousands of) instantiations. For example a lock in the inode
+struct is one class, while each inode has its own instantiation of that
+lock class.
+
+The validator tracks the 'state' of lock-classes, and it tracks
+dependencies between different lock-classes. The validator maintains a
+rolling proof that the state and the dependencies are correct.
+
+Unlike an lock instantiation, the lock-class itself never goes away: when
+a lock-class is used for the first time after bootup it gets registered,
+and all subsequent uses of that lock-class will be attached to this
+lock-class.
+
+State
+-----
+
+The validator tracks lock-class usage history into 5 separate state bits:
+
+- 'ever held in hardirq context'                    [ == hardirq-safe   ]
+- 'ever held in softirq context'                    [ == softirq-safe   ]
+- 'ever held with hardirqs enabled'                 [ == hardirq-unsafe ]
+- 'ever held with softirqs and hardirqs enabled'    [ == softirq-unsafe ]
+
+- 'ever used'                                       [ == !unused        ]
+
+Single-lock state rules:
+------------------------
+
+A softirq-unsafe lock-class is automatically hardirq-unsafe as well. The
+following states are exclusive, and only one of them is allowed to be
+set for any lock-class:
+
+ <hardirq-safe> and <hardirq-unsafe>
+ <softirq-safe> and <softirq-unsafe>
+
+The validator detects and reports lock usage that violate these
+single-lock state rules.
+
+Multi-lock dependency rules:
+----------------------------
+
+The same lock-class must not be acquired twice, because this could lead
+to lock recursion deadlocks.
+
+Furthermore, two locks may not be taken in different order:
+
+ <L1> -> <L2>
+ <L2> -> <L1>
+
+because this could lead to lock inversion deadlocks. (The validator
+finds such dependencies in arbitrary complexity, i.e. there can be any
+other locking sequence between the acquire-lock operations, the
+validator will still track all dependencies between locks.)
+
+Furthermore, the following usage based lock dependencies are not allowed
+between any two lock-classes:
+
+   <hardirq-safe>   ->  <hardirq-unsafe>
+   <softirq-safe>   ->  <softirq-unsafe>
+
+The first rule comes from the fact the a hardirq-safe lock could be
+taken by a hardirq context, interrupting a hardirq-unsafe lock - and
+thus could result in a lock inversion deadlock. Likewise, a softirq-safe
+lock could be taken by an softirq context, interrupting a softirq-unsafe
+lock.
+
+The above rules are enforced for any locking sequence that occurs in the
+kernel: when acquiring a new lock, the validator checks whether there is
+any rule violation between the new lock and any of the held locks.
+
+When a lock-class changes its state, the following aspects of the above
+dependency rules are enforced:
+
+- if a new hardirq-safe lock is discovered, we check whether it
+  took any hardirq-unsafe lock in the past.
+
+- if a new softirq-safe lock is discovered, we check whether it took
+  any softirq-unsafe lock in the past.
+
+- if a new hardirq-unsafe lock is discovered, we check whether any
+  hardirq-safe lock took it in the past.
+
+- if a new softirq-unsafe lock is discovered, we check whether any
+  softirq-safe lock took it in the past.
+
+(Again, we do these checks too on the basis that an interrupt context
+could interrupt _any_ of the irq-unsafe or hardirq-unsafe locks, which
+could lead to a lock inversion deadlock - even if that lock scenario did
+not trigger in practice yet.)
+
+Exception: Nested data dependencies leading to nested locking
+-------------------------------------------------------------
+
+There are a few cases where the Linux kernel acquires more than one
+instance of the same lock-class. Such cases typically happen when there
+is some sort of hierarchy within objects of the same type. In these
+cases there is an inherent "natural" ordering between the two objects
+(defined by the properties of the hierarchy), and the kernel grabs the
+locks in this fixed order on each of the objects.
+
+An example of such an object hieararchy that results in "nested locking"
+is that of a "whole disk" block-dev object and a "partition" block-dev
+object; the partition is "part of" the whole device and as long as one
+always takes the whole disk lock as a higher lock than the partition
+lock, the lock ordering is fully correct. The validator does not
+automatically detect this natural ordering, as the locking rule behind
+the ordering is not static.
+
+In order to teach the validator about this correct usage model, new
+versions of the various locking primitives were added that allow you to
+specify a "nesting level". An example call, for the block device mutex,
+looks like this:
+
+enum bdev_bd_mutex_lock_class
+{
+       BD_MUTEX_NORMAL,
+       BD_MUTEX_WHOLE,
+       BD_MUTEX_PARTITION
+};
+
+ mutex_lock_nested(&bdev->bd_contains->bd_mutex, BD_MUTEX_PARTITION);
+
+In this case the locking is done on a bdev object that is known to be a
+partition.
+
+The validator treats a lock that is taken in such a nested fasion as a
+separate (sub)class for the purposes of validation.
+
+Note: When changing code to use the _nested() primitives, be careful and
+check really thoroughly that the hiearchy is correctly mapped; otherwise
+you can get false positives or false negatives.
+
+Proof of 100% correctness:
+--------------------------
+
+The validator achieves perfect, mathematical 'closure' (proof of locking
+correctness) in the sense that for every simple, standalone single-task
+locking sequence that occured at least once during the lifetime of the
+kernel, the validator proves it with a 100% certainty that no
+combination and timing of these locking sequences can cause any class of
+lock related deadlock. [*]
+
+I.e. complex multi-CPU and multi-task locking scenarios do not have to
+occur in practice to prove a deadlock: only the simple 'component'
+locking chains have to occur at least once (anytime, in any
+task/context) for the validator to be able to prove correctness. (For
+example, complex deadlocks that would normally need more than 3 CPUs and
+a very unlikely constellation of tasks, irq-contexts and timings to
+occur, can be detected on a plain, lightly loaded single-CPU system as
+well!)
+
+This radically decreases the complexity of locking related QA of the
+kernel: what has to be done during QA is to trigger as many "simple"
+single-task locking dependencies in the kernel as possible, at least
+once, to prove locking correctness - instead of having to trigger every
+possible combination of locking interaction between CPUs, combined with
+every possible hardirq and softirq nesting scenario (which is impossible
+to do in practice).
+
+[*] assuming that the validator itself is 100% correct, and no other
+    part of the system corrupts the state of the validator in any way.
+    We also assume that all NMI/SMM paths [which could interrupt
+    even hardirq-disabled codepaths] are correct and do not interfere
+    with the validator. We also assume that the 64-bit 'chain hash'
+    value is unique for every lock-chain in the system. Also, lock
+    recursion must not be higher than 20.
+
+Performance:
+------------
+
+The above rules require _massive_ amounts of runtime checking. If we did
+that for every lock taken and for every irqs-enable event, it would
+render the system practically unusably slow. The complexity of checking
+is O(N^2), so even with just a few hundred lock-classes we'd have to do
+tens of thousands of checks for every event.
+
+This problem is solved by checking any given 'locking scenario' (unique
+sequence of locks taken after each other) only once. A simple stack of
+held locks is maintained, and a lightweight 64-bit hash value is
+calculated, which hash is unique for every lock chain. The hash value,
+when the chain is validated for the first time, is then put into a hash
+table, which hash-table can be checked in a lockfree manner. If the
+locking chain occurs again later on, the hash table tells us that we
+dont have to validate the chain again.

Documentation/md.txt

@@ -200,6 +200,17 @@ All md devices contain:
      This can be written only while the array is being assembled, not
      after it is started.
 
+  layout
+     The "layout" for the array for the particular level.  This is
+     simply a number that is interpretted differently by different
+     levels.  It can be written while assembling an array.
+
+  resync_start
+     The point at which resync should start.  If no resync is needed,
+     this will be a very large number.  At array creation it will
+     default to 0, though starting the array as 'clean' will
+     set it much larger.
+
    new_dev
      This file can be written but not read.  The value written should
      be a block device number as major:minor.  e.g. 8:0
@@ -207,6 +218,54 @@ All md devices contain:
      available.  It will then appear at md/dev-XXX (depending on the
      name of the device) and further configuration is then possible.
 
+   safe_mode_delay
+     When an md array has seen no write requests for a certain period
+     of time, it will be marked as 'clean'.  When another write
+     request arrive, the array is marked as 'dirty' before the write
+     commenses.  This is known as 'safe_mode'.
+     The 'certain period' is controlled by this file which stores the
+     period as a number of seconds.  The default is 200msec (0.200).
+     Writing a value of 0 disables safemode.
+
+   array_state
+     This file contains a single word which describes the current
+     state of the array.  In many cases, the state can be set by
+     writing the word for the desired state, however some states
+     cannot be explicitly set, and some transitions are not allowed.
+
+     clear
+         No devices, no size, no level
+         Writing is equivalent to STOP_ARRAY ioctl
+     inactive
+         May have some settings, but array is not active
+            all IO results in error
+         When written, doesn't tear down array, but just stops it
+     suspended (not supported yet)
+         All IO requests will block. The array can be reconfigured.
+         Writing this, if accepted, will block until array is quiessent
+     readonly
+         no resync can happen.  no superblocks get written.
+         write requests fail
+     read-auto
+         like readonly, but behaves like 'clean' on a write request.
+
+     clean - no pending writes, but otherwise active.
+         When written to inactive array, starts without resync
+         If a write request arrives then
+           if metadata is known, mark 'dirty' and switch to 'active'.
+           if not known, block and switch to write-pending
+         If written to an active array that has pending writes, then fails.
+     active
+         fully active: IO and resync can be happening.
+         When written to inactive array, starts with resync
+
+     write-pending
+         clean, but writes are blocked waiting for 'active' to be written.
+
+     active-idle
+         like active, but no writes have been seen for a while (safe_mode_delay).
+
+
    sync_speed_min
    sync_speed_max
      This are similar to /proc/sys/dev/raid/speed_limit_{min,max}
@@ -250,10 +309,18 @@ Each directory contains:
 	      faulty   - device has been kicked from active use due to
                          a detected fault
 	      in_sync  - device is a fully in-sync member of the array
+	      writemostly - device will only be subject to read
+		         requests if there are no other options.
+			 This applies only to raid1 arrays.
 	      spare    - device is working, but not a full member.
 			 This includes spares that are in the process
 			 of being recoverred to
 	This list make grow in future.
+	This can be written to.
+	Writing "faulty"  simulates a failure on the device.
+	Writing "remove" removes the device from the array.
+	Writing "writemostly" sets the writemostly flag.
+	Writing "-writemostly" clears the writemostly flag.
 
       errors
 	An approximate count of read errors that have been detected on

Documentation/memory-barriers.txt

@@ -262,9 +262,14 @@ What is required is some way of intervening to instruct the compiler and the
 CPU to restrict the order.
 
 Memory barriers are such interventions.  They impose a perceived partial
-ordering between the memory operations specified on either side of the barrier.
-They request that the sequence of memory events generated appears to other
-parts of the system as if the barrier is effective on that CPU.
+ordering over the memory operations on either side of the barrier.
+
+Such enforcement is important because the CPUs and other devices in a system
+can use a variety of tricks to improve performance - including reordering,
+deferral and combination of memory operations; speculative loads; speculative
+branch prediction and various types of caching.  Memory barriers are used to
+override or suppress these tricks, allowing the code to sanely control the
+interaction of multiple CPUs and/or devices.
 
 
 VARIETIES OF MEMORY BARRIER
@@ -282,7 +287,7 @@ Memory barriers come in four basic varieties:
      A write barrier is a partial ordering on stores only; it is not required
      to have any effect on loads.
 
-     A CPU can be viewed as as commiting a sequence of store operations to the
+     A CPU can be viewed as committing a sequence of store operations to the
      memory system as time progresses.  All stores before a write barrier will
      occur in the sequence _before_ all the stores after the write barrier.
 
@@ -413,7 +418,7 @@ There are certain things that the Linux kernel memory barriers do not guarantee:
      indirect effect will be the order in which the second CPU sees the effects
      of the first CPU's accesses occur, but see the next point:
 
- (*) There is no guarantee that the a CPU will see the correct order of effects
+ (*) There is no guarantee that a CPU will see the correct order of effects
      from a second CPU's accesses, even _if_ the second CPU uses a memory
      barrier, unless the first CPU _also_ uses a matching memory barrier (see
      the subsection on "SMP Barrier Pairing").
@@ -461,8 +466,8 @@ Whilst this may seem like a failure of coherency or causality maintenance, it
 isn't, and this behaviour can be observed on certain real CPUs (such as the DEC
 Alpha).
 
-To deal with this, a data dependency barrier must be inserted between the
-address load and the data load:
+To deal with this, a data dependency barrier or better must be inserted
+between the address load and the data load:
 
 	CPU 1		CPU 2
 	===============	===============
@@ -484,7 +489,7 @@ lines.  The pointer P might be stored in an odd-numbered cache line, and the
 variable B might be stored in an even-numbered cache line.  Then, if the
 even-numbered bank of the reading CPU's cache is extremely busy while the
 odd-numbered bank is idle, one can see the new value of the pointer P (&B),
-but the old value of the variable B (1).
+but the old value of the variable B (2).
 
 
 Another example of where data dependency barriers might by required is where a
@@ -597,7 +602,7 @@ Consider the following sequence of events:
 
 This sequence of events is committed to the memory coherence system in an order
 that the rest of the system might perceive as the unordered set of { STORE A,
-STORE B, STORE C } all occuring before the unordered set of { STORE D, STORE E
+STORE B, STORE C } all occurring before the unordered set of { STORE D, STORE E
 }:
 
 	+-------+       :      :
@@ -744,7 +749,7 @@ some effectively random order, despite the write barrier issued by CPU 1:
 	                                        :       :
 
 
-If, however, a read barrier were to be placed between the load of E and the
+If, however, a read barrier were to be placed between the load of B and the
 load of A on CPU 2:
 
 	CPU 1			CPU 2
@@ -1010,10 +1015,9 @@ CPU from reordering them.
 There are some more advanced barrier functions:
 
  (*) set_mb(var, value)
- (*) set_wmb(var, value)
 
-     These assign the value to the variable and then insert at least a write
-     barrier after it, depending on the function.  They aren't guaranteed to
+     This assigns the value to the variable and then inserts at least a write
+     barrier after it, depending on the function.  It isn't guaranteed to
      insert anything more than a compiler barrier in a UP compilation.
 
 
@@ -1461,9 +1465,8 @@ instruction itself is complete.
 
 On a UP system - where this wouldn't be a problem - the smp_mb() is just a
 compiler barrier, thus making sure the compiler emits the instructions in the
-right order without actually intervening in the CPU.  Since there there's only
-one CPU, that CPU's dependency ordering logic will take care of everything
-else.
+right order without actually intervening in the CPU.  Since there's only one
+CPU, that CPU's dependency ordering logic will take care of everything else.
 
 
 ATOMIC OPERATIONS
@@ -1640,9 +1643,9 @@ functions:
 
      The PCI bus, amongst others, defines an I/O space concept - which on such
      CPUs as i386 and x86_64 cpus readily maps to the CPU's concept of I/O
-     space.  However, it may also mapped as a virtual I/O space in the CPU's
-     memory map, particularly on those CPUs that don't support alternate
-     I/O spaces.
+     space.  However, it may also be mapped as a virtual I/O space in the CPU's
+     memory map, particularly on those CPUs that don't support alternate I/O
+     spaces.
 
      Accesses to this space may be fully synchronous (as on i386), but
      intermediary bridges (such as the PCI host bridge) may not fully honour

Documentation/mips/time.README

@@ -65,7 +65,7 @@ the following functions or values:
 	1. (optional) set up RTC routines
 	2. (optional) calibrate and set the mips_counter_frequency
 
-  b) board_timer_setup - a function pointer.  Invoked at the end of time_init()
+  b) plat_timer_setup - a function pointer.  Invoked at the end of time_init()
 	1. (optional) over-ride any decisions made in time_init()
 	2. set up the irqaction for timer interrupt.
 	3. enable the timer interrupt
@@ -116,19 +116,17 @@ Step 2:  the machine setup() function
 
   If you supply board_time_init(), set the function poointer.
 
-  Set the function pointer board_timer_setup() (mandatory)
 
-
-Step 3: implement rtc routines, board_time_init() and board_timer_setup()
+Step 3: implement rtc routines, board_time_init() and plat_timer_setup()
   if needed.
 
-  board_time_init() - 
+  board_time_init() -
   	a) (optional) set up RTC routines, 
         b) (optional) calibrate and set the mips_counter_frequency
  	    (only needed if you intended to use fixed_rate_gettimeoffset
  	     or use cpu counter as timer interrupt source)
 
-  board_timer_setup() - 
+  plat_timer_setup() -
  	a) (optional) over-write any choices made above by time_init().
  	b) machine specific code should setup the timer irqaction.
  	c) enable the timer interrupt

Documentation/networking/README.ipw2200

@@ -14,8 +14,8 @@ Copyright (C) 2004-2006, Intel Corporation
 
 README.ipw2200
 
-Version: 1.0.8
-Date   : October 20, 2005
+Version: 1.1.2
+Date   : March 30, 2006
 
 
 Index
@@ -103,7 +103,7 @@ file.
 
 1.1. Overview of Features
 -----------------------------------------------
-The current release (1.0.8) supports the following features:
+The current release (1.1.2) supports the following features:
 
 + BSS mode (Infrastructure, Managed)
 + IBSS mode (Ad-Hoc)
@@ -247,8 +247,8 @@ and can set the contents via echo.  For example:
 % cat /sys/bus/pci/drivers/ipw2200/debug_level
 
 Will report the current debug level of the driver's logging subsystem 
-(only available if CONFIG_IPW_DEBUG was configured when the driver was 
-built).
+(only available if CONFIG_IPW2200_DEBUG was configured when the driver
+was built).
 
 You can set the debug level via:
 

Documentation/networking/bonding.txt

@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
 
 		Linux Ethernet Bonding Driver HOWTO
 
-		Latest update: 21 June 2005
+		Latest update: 24 April 2006
 
 Initial release : Thomas Davis <tadavis at lbl.gov>
 Corrections, HA extensions : 2000/10/03-15 :
@@ -12,6 +12,8 @@ Corrections, HA extensions : 2000/10/03-15 :
   - Jay Vosburgh <fubar at us dot ibm dot com>
 
 Reorganized and updated Feb 2005 by Jay Vosburgh
+Added Sysfs information: 2006/04/24
+  - Mitch Williams <mitch.a.williams at intel.com>
 
 Introduction
 ============
@@ -38,61 +40,62 @@ Table of Contents
 2. Bonding Driver Options
 
 3. Configuring Bonding Devices
-3.1	Configuration with sysconfig support
-3.1.1		Using DHCP with sysconfig
-3.1.2		Configuring Multiple Bonds with sysconfig
-3.2	Configuration with initscripts support
-3.2.1		Using DHCP with initscripts
-3.2.2		Configuring Multiple Bonds with initscripts
-3.3	Configuring Bonding Manually
+3.1	Configuration with Sysconfig Support
+3.1.1		Using DHCP with Sysconfig
+3.1.2		Configuring Multiple Bonds with Sysconfig
+3.2	Configuration with Initscripts Support
+3.2.1		Using DHCP with Initscripts
+3.2.2		Configuring Multiple Bonds with Initscripts
+3.3	Configuring Bonding Manually with Ifenslave
 3.3.1		Configuring Multiple Bonds Manually
+3.4	Configuring Bonding Manually via Sysfs
 
-5. Querying Bonding Configuration
-5.1	Bonding Configuration
-5.2	Network Configuration
+4. Querying Bonding Configuration
+4.1	Bonding Configuration
+4.2	Network Configuration
 
-6. Switch Configuration
+5. Switch Configuration
 
-7. 802.1q VLAN Support
+6. 802.1q VLAN Support
 
-8. Link Monitoring
-8.1	ARP Monitor Operation
-8.2	Configuring Multiple ARP Targets
-8.3	MII Monitor Operation
+7. Link Monitoring
+7.1	ARP Monitor Operation
+7.2	Configuring Multiple ARP Targets
+7.3	MII Monitor Operation
 
-9. Potential Trouble Sources
-9.1	Adventures in Routing
-9.2	Ethernet Device Renaming
-9.3	Painfully Slow Or No Failed Link Detection By Miimon
+8. Potential Trouble Sources
+8.1	Adventures in Routing
+8.2	Ethernet Device Renaming
+8.3	Painfully Slow Or No Failed Link Detection By Miimon
 
-10. SNMP agents
+9. SNMP agents
 
-11. Promiscuous mode
+10. Promiscuous mode
 
-12. Configuring Bonding for High Availability
-12.1	High Availability in a Single Switch Topology
-12.2	High Availability in a Multiple Switch Topology
-12.2.1		HA Bonding Mode Selection for Multiple Switch Topology
-12.2.2		HA Link Monitoring for Multiple Switch Topology
+11. Configuring Bonding for High Availability
+11.1	High Availability in a Single Switch Topology
+11.2	High Availability in a Multiple Switch Topology
+11.2.1		HA Bonding Mode Selection for Multiple Switch Topology
+11.2.2		HA Link Monitoring for Multiple Switch Topology
 
-13. Configuring Bonding for Maximum Throughput
-13.1	Maximum Throughput in a Single Switch Topology
-13.1.1		MT Bonding Mode Selection for Single Switch Topology
-13.1.2		MT Link Monitoring for Single Switch Topology
-13.2	Maximum Throughput in a Multiple Switch Topology
-13.2.1		MT Bonding Mode Selection for Multiple Switch Topology
-13.2.2		MT Link Monitoring for Multiple Switch Topology
+12. Configuring Bonding for Maximum Throughput
+12.1	Maximum Throughput in a Single Switch Topology
+12.1.1		MT Bonding Mode Selection for Single Switch Topology
+12.1.2		MT Link Monitoring for Single Switch Topology
+12.2	Maximum Throughput in a Multiple Switch Topology
+12.2.1		MT Bonding Mode Selection for Multiple Switch Topology
+12.2.2		MT Link Monitoring for Multiple Switch Topology
 
-14. Switch Behavior Issues
-14.1	Link Establishment and Failover Delays
-14.2	Duplicated Incoming Packets
+13. Switch Behavior Issues
+13.1	Link Establishment and Failover Delays
+13.2	Duplicated Incoming Packets
 
-15. Hardware Specific Considerations
-15.1	IBM BladeCenter
+14. Hardware Specific Considerations
+14.1	IBM BladeCenter
 
-16. Frequently Asked Questions
+15. Frequently Asked Questions
 
-17. Resources and Links
+16. Resources and Links
 
 
 1. Bonding Driver Installation
@@ -156,6 +159,9 @@ you're trying to build it for.  Some distros (e.g., Red Hat from 7.1
 onwards) do not have /usr/include/linux symbolically linked to the
 default kernel source include directory.
 
+SECOND IMPORTANT NOTE:
+	If you plan to configure bonding using sysfs, you do not need
+to use ifenslave.
 
 2. Bonding Driver Options
 =========================
@@ -270,7 +276,7 @@ mode
 		In bonding version 2.6.2 or later, when a failover
 		occurs in active-backup mode, bonding will issue one
 		or more gratuitous ARPs on the newly active slave.
-		One gratutious ARP is issued for the bonding master
+		One gratuitous ARP is issued for the bonding master
 		interface and each VLAN interfaces configured above
 		it, provided that the interface has at least one IP
 		address configured.  Gratuitous ARPs issued for VLAN
@@ -377,7 +383,7 @@ mode
 		When a link is reconnected or a new slave joins the
 		bond the receive traffic is redistributed among all
 		active slaves in the bond by initiating ARP Replies
-		with the selected mac address to each of the
+		with the selected MAC address to each of the
 		clients. The updelay parameter (detailed below) must
 		be set to a value equal or greater than the switch's
 		forwarding delay so that the ARP Replies sent to the
@@ -498,11 +504,12 @@ not exist, and the layer2 policy is the only policy.
 3. Configuring Bonding Devices
 ==============================
 
-	There are, essentially, two methods for configuring bonding:
-with support from the distro's network initialization scripts, and
-without.  Distros generally use one of two packages for the network
-initialization scripts: initscripts or sysconfig.  Recent versions of
-these packages have support for bonding, while older versions do not.
+	You can configure bonding using either your distro's network
+initialization scripts, or manually using either ifenslave or the
+sysfs interface.  Distros generally use one of two packages for the
+network initialization scripts: initscripts or sysconfig.  Recent
+versions of these packages have support for bonding, while older
+versions do not.
 
 	We will first describe the options for configuring bonding for
 distros using versions of initscripts and sysconfig with full or
@@ -530,7 +537,7 @@ $ grep ifenslave /sbin/ifup
 	If this returns any matches, then your initscripts or
 sysconfig has support for bonding.
 
-3.1 Configuration with sysconfig support
+3.1 Configuration with Sysconfig Support
 ----------------------------------------
 
 	This section applies to distros using a version of sysconfig
@@ -538,7 +545,7 @@ with bonding support, for example, SuSE Linux Enterprise Server 9.
 
 	SuSE SLES 9's networking configuration system does support
 bonding, however, at this writing, the YaST system configuration
-frontend does not provide any means to work with bonding devices.
+front end does not provide any means to work with bonding devices.
 Bonding devices can be managed by hand, however, as follows.
 
 	First, if they have not already been configured, configure the
@@ -660,7 +667,7 @@ format can be found in an example ifcfg template file:
 	Note that the template does not document the various BONDING_
 settings described above, but does describe many of the other options.
 
-3.1.1 Using DHCP with sysconfig
+3.1.1 Using DHCP with Sysconfig
 -------------------------------
 
 	Under sysconfig, configuring a device with BOOTPROTO='dhcp'
@@ -670,7 +677,7 @@ attempt to obtain the device address from DHCP prior to adding any of
 the slave devices.  Without active slaves, the DHCP requests are not
 sent to the network.
 
-3.1.2 Configuring Multiple Bonds with sysconfig
+3.1.2 Configuring Multiple Bonds with Sysconfig
 -----------------------------------------------
 
 	The sysconfig network initialization system is capable of
@@ -685,7 +692,7 @@ ifcfg-bondX files.
 options in the ifcfg-bondX file, it is not necessary to add them to
 the system /etc/modules.conf or /etc/modprobe.conf configuration file.
 
-3.2 Configuration with initscripts support
+3.2 Configuration with Initscripts Support
 ------------------------------------------
 
 	This section applies to distros using a version of initscripts
@@ -756,7 +763,7 @@ options for your configuration.
 will restart the networking subsystem and your bond link should be now
 up and running.
 
-3.2.1 Using DHCP with initscripts
+3.2.1 Using DHCP with Initscripts
 ---------------------------------
 
 	Recent versions of initscripts (the version supplied with
@@ -768,7 +775,7 @@ above, except replace the line "BOOTPROTO=none" with "BOOTPROTO=dhcp"
 and add a line consisting of "TYPE=Bonding".  Note that the TYPE value
 is case sensitive.
 
-3.2.2 Configuring Multiple Bonds with initscripts
+3.2.2 Configuring Multiple Bonds with Initscripts
 -------------------------------------------------
 
 	At this writing, the initscripts package does not directly
@@ -784,8 +791,8 @@ Fedora Core kernels, and has been seen on RHEL 4 as well.  On kernels
 exhibiting this problem, it will be impossible to configure multiple
 bonds with differing parameters.
 
-3.3 Configuring Bonding Manually
---------------------------------
+3.3 Configuring Bonding Manually with Ifenslave
+-----------------------------------------------
 
 	This section applies to distros whose network initialization
 scripts (the sysconfig or initscripts package) do not have specific
@@ -889,11 +896,139 @@ install bond1 /sbin/modprobe --ignore-install bonding -o bond1 \
 	This may be repeated any number of times, specifying a new and
 unique name in place of bond1 for each subsequent instance.
 
+3.4 Configuring Bonding Manually via Sysfs
+------------------------------------------
 
-5. Querying Bonding Configuration 
+	Starting with version 3.0, Channel Bonding may be configured
+via the sysfs interface.  This interface allows dynamic configuration
+of all bonds in the system without unloading the module.  It also
+allows for adding and removing bonds at runtime.  Ifenslave is no
+longer required, though it is still supported.
+
+	Use of the sysfs interface allows you to use multiple bonds
+with different configurations without having to reload the module.
+It also allows you to use multiple, differently configured bonds when
+bonding is compiled into the kernel.
+
+	You must have the sysfs filesystem mounted to configure
+bonding this way.  The examples in this document assume that you
+are using the standard mount point for sysfs, e.g. /sys.  If your
+sysfs filesystem is mounted elsewhere, you will need to adjust the
+example paths accordingly.
+
+Creating and Destroying Bonds
+-----------------------------
+To add a new bond foo:
+# echo +foo > /sys/class/net/bonding_masters
+
+To remove an existing bond bar:
+# echo -bar > /sys/class/net/bonding_masters
+
+To show all existing bonds:
+# cat /sys/class/net/bonding_masters
+
+NOTE: due to 4K size limitation of sysfs files, this list may be
+truncated if you have more than a few hundred bonds.  This is unlikely
+to occur under normal operating conditions.
+
+Adding and Removing Slaves
+--------------------------
+	Interfaces may be enslaved to a bond using the file
+/sys/class/net/<bond>/bonding/slaves.  The semantics for this file
+are the same as for the bonding_masters file.
+
+To enslave interface eth0 to bond bond0:
+# ifconfig bond0 up
+# echo +eth0 > /sys/class/net/bond0/bonding/slaves
+
+To free slave eth0 from bond bond0:
+# echo -eth0 > /sys/class/net/bond0/bonding/slaves
+
+	NOTE: The bond must be up before slaves can be added.  All
+slaves are freed when the interface is brought down.
+
+	When an interface is enslaved to a bond, symlinks between the
+two are created in the sysfs filesystem.  In this case, you would get
+/sys/class/net/bond0/slave_eth0 pointing to /sys/class/net/eth0, and
+/sys/class/net/eth0/master pointing to /sys/class/net/bond0.
+
+	This means that you can tell quickly whether or not an
+interface is enslaved by looking for the master symlink.  Thus:
+# echo -eth0 > /sys/class/net/eth0/master/bonding/slaves
+will free eth0 from whatever bond it is enslaved to, regardless of
+the name of the bond interface.
+
+Changing a Bond's Configuration
+-------------------------------
+	Each bond may be configured individually by manipulating the
+files located in /sys/class/net/<bond name>/bonding
+
+	The names of these files correspond directly with the command-
+line parameters described elsewhere in in this file, and, with the
+exception of arp_ip_target, they accept the same values.  To see the
+current setting, simply cat the appropriate file.
+
+	A few examples will be given here; for specific usage
+guidelines for each parameter, see the appropriate section in this
+document.
+
+To configure bond0 for balance-alb mode:
+# ifconfig bond0 down
+# echo 6 > /sys/class/net/bond0/bonding/mode
+ - or -
+# echo balance-alb > /sys/class/net/bond0/bonding/mode
+	NOTE: The bond interface must be down before the mode can be
+changed.
+
+To enable MII monitoring on bond0 with a 1 second interval:
+# echo 1000 > /sys/class/net/bond0/bonding/miimon
+	NOTE: If ARP monitoring is enabled, it will disabled when MII
+monitoring is enabled, and vice-versa.
+
+To add ARP targets:
+# echo +192.168.0.100 > /sys/class/net/bond0/bonding/arp_ip_target
+# echo +192.168.0.101 > /sys/class/net/bond0/bonding/arp_ip_target
+	NOTE:  up to 10 target addresses may be specified.
+
+To remove an ARP target:
+# echo -192.168.0.100 > /sys/class/net/bond0/bonding/arp_ip_target
+
+Example Configuration
+---------------------
+	We begin with the same example that is shown in section 3.3,
+executed with sysfs, and without using ifenslave.
+
+	To make a simple bond of two e100 devices (presumed to be eth0
+and eth1), and have it persist across reboots, edit the appropriate
+file (/etc/init.d/boot.local or /etc/rc.d/rc.local), and add the
+following:
+
+modprobe bonding
+modprobe e100
+echo balance-alb > /sys/class/net/bond0/bonding/mode
+ifconfig bond0 192.168.1.1 netmask 255.255.255.0 up
+echo 100 > /sys/class/net/bond0/bonding/miimon
+echo +eth0 > /sys/class/net/bond0/bonding/slaves
+echo +eth1 > /sys/class/net/bond0/bonding/slaves
+
+	To add a second bond, with two e1000 interfaces in
+active-backup mode, using ARP monitoring, add the following lines to
+your init script:
+
+modprobe e1000
+echo +bond1 > /sys/class/net/bonding_masters
+echo active-backup > /sys/class/net/bond1/bonding/mode
+ifconfig bond1 192.168.2.1 netmask 255.255.255.0 up
+echo +192.168.2.100 /sys/class/net/bond1/bonding/arp_ip_target
+echo 2000 > /sys/class/net/bond1/bonding/arp_interval
+echo +eth2 > /sys/class/net/bond1/bonding/slaves
+echo +eth3 > /sys/class/net/bond1/bonding/slaves
+
+
+4. Querying Bonding Configuration 
 =================================
 
-5.1 Bonding Configuration
+4.1 Bonding Configuration
 -------------------------
 
 	Each bonding device has a read-only file residing in the
@@ -923,7 +1058,7 @@ generally as follows:
 	The precise format and contents will change depending upon the
 bonding configuration, state, and version of the bonding driver.
 
-5.2 Network configuration
+4.2 Network configuration
 -------------------------
 
 	The network configuration can be inspected using the ifconfig
@@ -958,7 +1093,7 @@ eth1      Link encap:Ethernet  HWaddr 00:C0:F0:1F:37:B4
           collisions:0 txqueuelen:100
           Interrupt:9 Base address:0x1400
 
-6. Switch Configuration
+5. Switch Configuration
 =======================
 
 	For this section, "switch" refers to whatever system the
@@ -991,7 +1126,7 @@ transmit policy for an EtherChannel group; all three will interoperate
 with another EtherChannel group.
 
 
-7. 802.1q VLAN Support
+6. 802.1q VLAN Support
 ======================
 
 	It is possible to configure VLAN devices over a bond interface
@@ -1042,7 +1177,7 @@ underlying device -- i.e. the bonding interface -- to promiscuous
 mode, which might not be what you want.
 
 
-8. Link Monitoring
+7. Link Monitoring
 ==================
 
 	The bonding driver at present supports two schemes for
@@ -1053,7 +1188,7 @@ monitor.
 bonding driver itself, it is not possible to enable both ARP and MII
 monitoring simultaneously.
 
-8.1 ARP Monitor Operation
+7.1 ARP Monitor Operation
 -------------------------
 
 	The ARP monitor operates as its name suggests: it sends ARP
@@ -1071,7 +1206,7 @@ those slaves will stay down.  If networking monitoring (tcpdump, etc)
 shows the ARP requests and replies on the network, then it may be that
 your device driver is not updating last_rx and trans_start.
 
-8.2 Configuring Multiple ARP Targets
+7.2 Configuring Multiple ARP Targets
 ------------------------------------
 
 	While ARP monitoring can be done with just one target, it can
@@ -1094,7 +1229,7 @@ alias bond0 bonding
 options bond0 arp_interval=60 arp_ip_target=192.168.0.100
 
 
-8.3 MII Monitor Operation
+7.3 MII Monitor Operation
 -------------------------
 
 	The MII monitor monitors only the carrier state of the local
@@ -1120,14 +1255,14 @@ does not support or had some error in processing both the MII register
 and ethtool requests), then the MII monitor will assume the link is
 up.
 
-9. Potential Sources of Trouble
+8. Potential Sources of Trouble
 ===============================
 
-9.1 Adventures in Routing
+8.1 Adventures in Routing
 -------------------------
 
 	When bonding is configured, it is important that the slave
-devices not have routes that supercede routes of the master (or,
+devices not have routes that supersede routes of the master (or,
 generally, not have routes at all).  For example, suppose the bonding
 device bond0 has two slaves, eth0 and eth1, and the routing table is
 as follows:
@@ -1154,11 +1289,11 @@ by the state of the routing table.
 
 	The solution here is simply to insure that slaves do not have
 routes of their own, and if for some reason they must, those routes do
-not supercede routes of their master.  This should generally be the
+not supersede routes of their master.  This should generally be the
 case, but unusual configurations or errant manual or automatic static
 route additions may cause trouble.
 
-9.2 Ethernet Device Renaming
+8.2 Ethernet Device Renaming
 ----------------------------
 
 	On systems with network configuration scripts that do not
@@ -1207,7 +1342,7 @@ modprobe with --ignore-install to cause the normal action to then take
 place.  Full documentation on this can be found in the modprobe.conf
 and modprobe manual pages.
 
-9.3. Painfully Slow Or No Failed Link Detection By Miimon
+8.3. Painfully Slow Or No Failed Link Detection By Miimon
 ---------------------------------------------------------
 
 	By default, bonding enables the use_carrier option, which
@@ -1235,7 +1370,7 @@ carrier state.  It has no way to determine the state of devices on or
 beyond other ports of a switch, or if a switch is refusing to pass
 traffic while still maintaining carrier on.
 
-10. SNMP agents
+9. SNMP agents
 ===============
 
 	If running SNMP agents, the bonding driver should be loaded
@@ -1281,7 +1416,7 @@ ifDescr, the association between the IP address and IfIndex remains
 and SNMP functions such as Interface_Scan_Next will report that
 association.
 
-11. Promiscuous mode
+10. Promiscuous mode
 ====================
 
 	When running network monitoring tools, e.g., tcpdump, it is
@@ -1308,7 +1443,7 @@ sending to peers that are unassigned or if the load is unbalanced.
 the active slave changes (e.g., due to a link failure), the
 promiscuous setting will be propagated to the new active slave.
 
-12. Configuring Bonding for High Availability
+11. Configuring Bonding for High Availability
 =============================================
 
 	High Availability refers to configurations that provide
@@ -1318,7 +1453,7 @@ goal is to provide the maximum availability of network connectivity
 (i.e., the network always works), even though other configurations
 could provide higher throughput.
 
-12.1 High Availability in a Single Switch Topology
+11.1 High Availability in a Single Switch Topology
 --------------------------------------------------
 
 	If two hosts (or a host and a single switch) are directly
@@ -1332,7 +1467,7 @@ the load will be rebalanced across the remaining devices.
 	See Section 13, "Configuring Bonding for Maximum Throughput"
 for information on configuring bonding with one peer device.
 
-12.2 High Availability in a Multiple Switch Topology
+11.2 High Availability in a Multiple Switch Topology
 ----------------------------------------------------
 
 	With multiple switches, the configuration of bonding and the
@@ -1359,7 +1494,7 @@ switches (ISL, or inter switch link), and multiple ports connecting to
 the outside world ("port3" on each switch).  There is no technical
 reason that this could not be extended to a third switch.
 
-12.2.1 HA Bonding Mode Selection for Multiple Switch Topology
+11.2.1 HA Bonding Mode Selection for Multiple Switch Topology
 -------------------------------------------------------------
 
 	In a topology such as the example above, the active-backup and
@@ -1381,7 +1516,7 @@ broadcast: This mode is really a special purpose mode, and is suitable
 	necessary for some specific one-way traffic to reach both
 	independent networks, then the broadcast mode may be suitable.
 
-12.2.2 HA Link Monitoring Selection for Multiple Switch Topology
+11.2.2 HA Link Monitoring Selection for Multiple Switch Topology
 ----------------------------------------------------------------
 
 	The choice of link monitoring ultimately depends upon your
@@ -1402,10 +1537,10 @@ regardless of which switch is active, the ARP monitor has a suitable
 target to query.
 
 
-13. Configuring Bonding for Maximum Throughput
+12. Configuring Bonding for Maximum Throughput
 ==============================================
 
-13.1 Maximizing Throughput in a Single Switch Topology
+12.1 Maximizing Throughput in a Single Switch Topology
 ------------------------------------------------------
 
 	In a single switch configuration, the best method to maximize
@@ -1476,7 +1611,7 @@ destination to make load balancing decisions.  The behavior of each
 mode is described below.
 
 
-13.1.1 MT Bonding Mode Selection for Single Switch Topology
+12.1.1 MT Bonding Mode Selection for Single Switch Topology
 -----------------------------------------------------------
 
 	This configuration is the easiest to set up and to understand,
@@ -1607,7 +1742,7 @@ balance-alb: This mode is everything that balance-tlb is, and more.
 	device driver must support changing the hardware address while
 	the device is open.
 
-13.1.2 MT Link Monitoring for Single Switch Topology
+12.1.2 MT Link Monitoring for Single Switch Topology
 ----------------------------------------------------
 
 	The choice of link monitoring may largely depend upon which
@@ -1616,7 +1751,7 @@ support the use of the ARP monitor, and are thus restricted to using
 the MII monitor (which does not provide as high a level of end to end
 assurance as the ARP monitor).
 
-13.2 Maximum Throughput in a Multiple Switch Topology
+12.2 Maximum Throughput in a Multiple Switch Topology
 -----------------------------------------------------
 
 	Multiple switches may be utilized to optimize for throughput
@@ -1651,7 +1786,7 @@ a single 72 port switch.
 can be equipped with an additional network device connected to an
 external network; this host then additionally acts as a gateway.
 
-13.2.1 MT Bonding Mode Selection for Multiple Switch Topology
+12.2.1 MT Bonding Mode Selection for Multiple Switch Topology
 -------------------------------------------------------------
 
 	In actual practice, the bonding mode typically employed in
@@ -1664,7 +1799,7 @@ packets has arrived).  When employed in this fashion, the balance-rr
 mode allows individual connections between two hosts to effectively
 utilize greater than one interface's bandwidth.
 
-13.2.2 MT Link Monitoring for Multiple Switch Topology
+12.2.2 MT Link Monitoring for Multiple Switch Topology
 ------------------------------------------------------
 
 	Again, in actual practice, the MII monitor is most often used
@@ -1674,10 +1809,10 @@ advantages over the MII monitor are mitigated by the volume of probes
 needed as the number of systems involved grows (remember that each
 host in the network is configured with bonding).
 
-14. Switch Behavior Issues
+13. Switch Behavior Issues
 ==========================
 
-14.1 Link Establishment and Failover Delays
+13.1 Link Establishment and Failover Delays
 -------------------------------------------
 
 	Some switches exhibit undesirable behavior with regard to the
@@ -1712,7 +1847,7 @@ switches take a long time to go into backup mode, it may be desirable
 to not activate a backup interface immediately after a link goes down.
 Failover may be delayed via the downdelay bonding module option.
 
-14.2 Duplicated Incoming Packets
+13.2 Duplicated Incoming Packets
 --------------------------------
 
 	It is not uncommon to observe a short burst of duplicated
@@ -1751,14 +1886,14 @@ behavior, it can be induced by clearing the MAC forwarding table (on
 most Cisco switches, the privileged command "clear mac address-table
 dynamic" will accomplish this).
 
-15. Hardware Specific Considerations
+14. Hardware Specific Considerations
 ====================================
 
 	This section contains additional information for configuring
 bonding on specific hardware platforms, or for interfacing bonding
 with particular switches or other devices.
 
-15.1 IBM BladeCenter
+14.1 IBM BladeCenter
 --------------------
 
 	This applies to the JS20 and similar systems.
@@ -1861,7 +1996,7 @@ bonding driver.
 avoid fail-over delay issues when using bonding.
 
 	
-16. Frequently Asked Questions
+15. Frequently Asked Questions
 ==============================
 
 1.  Is it SMP safe?
@@ -1925,7 +2060,7 @@ not have special switch requirements, but do need device drivers that
 support specific features (described in the appropriate section under
 module parameters, above).
 
-	In 802.3ad mode, it works with with systems that support IEEE
+	In 802.3ad mode, it works with systems that support IEEE
 802.3ad Dynamic Link Aggregation.  Most managed and many unmanaged
 switches currently available support 802.3ad.
 

Documentation/networking/ip-sysctl.txt

@@ -362,6 +362,13 @@ tcp_workaround_signed_windows - BOOLEAN
 	not receive a window scaling option from them.
 	Default: 0
 
+tcp_slow_start_after_idle - BOOLEAN
+	If set, provide RFC2861 behavior and time out the congestion
+	window after an idle period.  An idle period is defined at
+	the current RTO.  If unset, the congestion window will not
+	be timed out after an idle period.
+	Default: 1
+
 IP Variables:
 
 ip_local_port_range - 2 INTEGERS

Documentation/networking/ipvs-sysctl.txt

@@ -0,0 +1,143 @@
+/proc/sys/net/ipv4/vs/* Variables:
+
+am_droprate - INTEGER
+        default 10
+
+        It sets the always mode drop rate, which is used in the mode 3
+        of the drop_rate defense.
+
+amemthresh - INTEGER
+        default 1024
+
+        It sets the available memory threshold (in pages), which is
+        used in the automatic modes of defense. When there is no
+        enough available memory, the respective strategy will be
+        enabled and the variable is automatically set to 2, otherwise
+        the strategy is disabled and the variable is  set  to 1.
+
+cache_bypass - BOOLEAN
+        0 - disabled (default)
+        not 0 - enabled
+
+        If it is enabled, forward packets to the original destination
+        directly when no cache server is available and destination
+        address is not local (iph->daddr is RTN_UNICAST). It is mostly
+        used in transparent web cache cluster.
+
+debug_level - INTEGER
+	0          - transmission error messages (default)
+	1          - non-fatal error messages
+	2          - configuration
+	3          - destination trash
+	4          - drop entry
+	5          - service lookup
+	6          - scheduling
+	7          - connection new/expire, lookup and synchronization
+	8          - state transition
+	9          - binding destination, template checks and applications
+	10         - IPVS packet transmission
+	11         - IPVS packet handling (ip_vs_in/ip_vs_out)
+	12 or more - packet traversal
+
+	Only available when IPVS is compiled with the CONFIG_IPVS_DEBUG
+
+	Higher debugging levels include the messages for lower debugging
+	levels, so setting debug level 2, includes level 0, 1 and 2
+	messages. Thus, logging becomes more and more verbose the higher
+	the level.
+
+drop_entry - INTEGER
+        0  - disabled (default)
+
+        The drop_entry defense is to randomly drop entries in the
+        connection hash table, just in order to collect back some
+        memory for new connections. In the current code, the
+        drop_entry procedure can be activated every second, then it
+        randomly scans 1/32 of the whole and drops entries that are in
+        the SYN-RECV/SYNACK state, which should be effective against
+        syn-flooding attack.
+
+        The valid values of drop_entry are from 0 to 3, where 0 means
+        that this strategy is always disabled, 1 and 2 mean automatic
+        modes (when there is no enough available memory, the strategy
+        is enabled and the variable is automatically set to 2,
+        otherwise the strategy is disabled and the variable is set to
+        1), and 3 means that that the strategy is always enabled.
+
+drop_packet - INTEGER
+        0  - disabled (default)
+
+        The drop_packet defense is designed to drop 1/rate packets
+        before forwarding them to real servers. If the rate is 1, then
+        drop all the incoming packets.
+
+        The value definition is the same as that of the drop_entry. In
+        the automatic mode, the rate is determined by the follow
+        formula: rate = amemthresh / (amemthresh - available_memory)
+        when available memory is less than the available memory
+        threshold. When the mode 3 is set, the always mode drop rate
+        is controlled by the /proc/sys/net/ipv4/vs/am_droprate.
+
+expire_nodest_conn - BOOLEAN
+        0 - disabled (default)
+        not 0 - enabled
+
+        The default value is 0, the load balancer will silently drop
+        packets when its destination server is not available. It may
+        be useful, when user-space monitoring program deletes the
+        destination server (because of server overload or wrong
+        detection) and add back the server later, and the connections
+        to the server can continue.
+
+        If this feature is enabled, the load balancer will expire the
+        connection immediately when a packet arrives and its
+        destination server is not available, then the client program
+        will be notified that the connection is closed. This is
+        equivalent to the feature some people requires to flush
+        connections when its destination is not available.
+
+expire_quiescent_template - BOOLEAN
+	0 - disabled (default)
+	not 0 - enabled
+
+	When set to a non-zero value, the load balancer will expire
+	persistent templates when the destination server is quiescent.
+	This may be useful, when a user makes a destination server
+	quiescent by setting its weight to 0 and it is desired that
+	subsequent otherwise persistent connections are sent to a
+	different destination server.  By default new persistent
+	connections are allowed to quiescent destination servers.
+
+	If this feature is enabled, the load balancer will expire the
+	persistence template if it is to be used to schedule a new
+	connection and the destination server is quiescent.
+
+nat_icmp_send - BOOLEAN
+        0 - disabled (default)
+        not 0 - enabled
+
+        It controls sending icmp error messages (ICMP_DEST_UNREACH)
+        for VS/NAT when the load balancer receives packets from real
+        servers but the connection entries don't exist.
+
+secure_tcp - INTEGER
+        0  - disabled (default)
+
+        The secure_tcp defense is to use a more complicated state
+        transition table and some possible short timeouts of each
+        state. In the VS/NAT, it delays the entering the ESTABLISHED
+        until the real server starts to send data and ACK packet
+        (after 3-way handshake).
+
+        The value definition is the same as that of drop_entry or
+        drop_packet.
+
+sync_threshold - INTEGER
+        default 3
+
+        It sets synchronization threshold, which is the minimum number
+        of incoming packets that a connection needs to receive before
+        the connection will be synchronized. A connection will be
+        synchronized, every time the number of its incoming packets
+        modulus 50 equals the threshold. The range of the threshold is
+        from 0 to 49.

Documentation/networking/netdevices.txt

@@ -42,9 +42,9 @@ dev->get_stats:
 	Context: nominally process, but don't sleep inside an rwlock
 
 dev->hard_start_xmit:
-	Synchronization: dev->xmit_lock spinlock.
+	Synchronization: netif_tx_lock spinlock.
 	When the driver sets NETIF_F_LLTX in dev->features this will be
-	called without holding xmit_lock. In this case the driver 
+	called without holding netif_tx_lock. In this case the driver
 	has to lock by itself when needed. It is recommended to use a try lock
 	for this and return -1 when the spin lock fails. 
 	The locking there should also properly protect against 
@@ -62,12 +62,12 @@ dev->hard_start_xmit:
 	  Only valid when NETIF_F_LLTX is set.
 
 dev->tx_timeout:
-	Synchronization: dev->xmit_lock spinlock.
+	Synchronization: netif_tx_lock spinlock.
 	Context: BHs disabled
 	Notes: netif_queue_stopped() is guaranteed true
 
 dev->set_multicast_list:
-	Synchronization: dev->xmit_lock spinlock.
+	Synchronization: netif_tx_lock spinlock.
 	Context: BHs disabled
 
 dev->poll:

Documentation/networking/pktgen.txt

@@ -74,7 +74,7 @@ Examples:
  pgset "pkt_size 9014"   sets packet size to 9014
  pgset "frags 5"         packet will consist of 5 fragments
  pgset "count 200000"    sets number of packets to send, set to zero
-                         for continious sends untill explicitl stopped.
+                         for continuous sends until explicitly stopped.
 
  pgset "delay 5000"      adds delay to hard_start_xmit(). nanoseconds
 

Documentation/networking/tuntap.txt

@@ -39,10 +39,13 @@ Copyright (C) 1999-2000 Maxim Krasnyansky <max_mk@yahoo.com>
      mknod /dev/net/tun c 10 200
   
   Set permissions:
-     e.g. chmod 0700 /dev/net/tun
-     if you want the device only accessible by root. Giving regular users the
-     right to assign network devices is NOT a good idea. Users could assign
-     bogus network interfaces to trick firewalls or administrators.
+     e.g. chmod 0666 /dev/net/tun
+     There's no harm in allowing the device to be accessible by non-root users,
+     since CAP_NET_ADMIN is required for creating network devices or for 
+     connecting to network devices which aren't owned by the user in question.
+     If you want to create persistent devices and give ownership of them to 
+     unprivileged users, then you need the /dev/net/tun device to be usable by
+     those users.
 
   Driver module autoloading
 

Documentation/nfsroot.txt

@@ -4,15 +4,16 @@ Mounting the root filesystem via NFS (nfsroot)
 Written 1996 by Gero Kuhlmann <gero@gkminix.han.de>
 Updated 1997 by Martin Mares <mj@atrey.karlin.mff.cuni.cz>
 Updated 2006 by Nico Schottelius <nico-kernel-nfsroot@schottelius.org>
+Updated 2006 by Horms <horms@verge.net.au>
 
 
 
-If you want to use a diskless system, as an X-terminal or printer
-server for example, you have to put your root filesystem onto a
-non-disk device. This can either be a ramdisk (see initrd.txt in
-this directory for further information) or a filesystem mounted
-via NFS. The following text describes on how to use NFS for the
-root filesystem. For the rest of this text 'client' means the
+In order to use a diskless system, such as an X-terminal or printer server
+for example, it is necessary for the root filesystem to be present on a
+non-disk device. This may be an initramfs (see Documentation/filesystems/
+ramfs-rootfs-initramfs.txt), a ramdisk (see Documenation/initrd.txt) or a
+filesystem mounted via NFS. The following text describes on how to use NFS
+for the root filesystem. For the rest of this text 'client' means the
 diskless system, and 'server' means the NFS server.
 
 
@@ -21,11 +22,13 @@ diskless system, and 'server' means the NFS server.
 1.) Enabling nfsroot capabilities
     -----------------------------
 
-In order to use nfsroot you have to select support for NFS during
-kernel configuration. Note that NFS cannot be loaded as a module
-in this case. The configuration script will then ask you whether
-you want to use nfsroot, and if yes what kind of auto configuration
-system you want to use. Selecting both BOOTP and RARP is safe.
+In order to use nfsroot, NFS client support needs to be selected as
+built-in during configuration. Once this has been selected, the nfsroot
+option will become available, which should also be selected.
+
+In the networking options, kernel level autoconfiguration can be selected,
+along with the types of autoconfiguration to support. Selecting all of
+DHCP, BOOTP and RARP is safe.
 
 
 
@@ -33,11 +36,10 @@ system you want to use. Selecting both BOOTP and RARP is safe.
 2.) Kernel command line
     -------------------
 
-When the kernel has been loaded by a boot loader (either by loadlin,
-LILO or a network boot program) it has to be told what root fs device
-to use, and where to find the server and the name of the directory
-on the server to mount as root. This can be established by a couple
-of kernel command line parameters:
+When the kernel has been loaded by a boot loader (see below) it needs to be
+told what root fs device to use. And in the case of nfsroot, where to find
+both the server and the name of the directory on the server to mount as root.
+This can be established using the following kernel command line parameters:
 
 
 root=/dev/nfs
@@ -49,23 +51,21 @@ root=/dev/nfs
 
 nfsroot=[<server-ip>:]<root-dir>[,<nfs-options>]
 
-  If the `nfsroot' parameter is NOT given on the command line, the default
-  "/tftpboot/%s" will be used.
+  If the `nfsroot' parameter is NOT given on the command line,
+  the default "/tftpboot/%s" will be used.
 
-  <server-ip>	Specifies the IP address of the NFS server. If this field
-		is not given, the default address as determined by the
-		`ip' variable (see below) is used. One use of this
-		parameter is for example to allow using different servers
-		for RARP and NFS. Usually you can leave this blank.
+  <server-ip>	Specifies the IP address of the NFS server.
+		The default address is determined by the `ip' parameter
+		(see below). This parameter allows the use of different
+		servers for IP autoconfiguration and NFS.
 
-  <root-dir>	Name of the directory on the server to mount as root. If
-		there is a "%s" token in the string, the token will be
-		replaced by the ASCII-representation of the client's IP
-		address.
+  <root-dir>	Name of the directory on the server to mount as root.
+		If there is a "%s" token in the string, it will be
+		replaced by the ASCII-representation of the client's
+		IP address.
 
   <nfs-options>	Standard NFS options. All options are separated by commas.
-		If the options field is not given, the following defaults
-		will be used:
+		The following defaults are used:
 			port		= as given by server portmap daemon
 			rsize		= 1024
 			wsize		= 1024
@@ -81,129 +81,174 @@ nfsroot=[<server-ip>:]<root-dir>[,<nfs-options>]
 ip=<client-ip>:<server-ip>:<gw-ip>:<netmask>:<hostname>:<device>:<autoconf>
 
   This parameter tells the kernel how to configure IP addresses of devices
-  and also how to set up the IP routing table. It was originally called `nfsaddrs',
-  but now the boot-time IP configuration works independently of NFS, so it
-  was renamed to `ip' and the old name remained as an alias for compatibility
-  reasons.
+  and also how to set up the IP routing table. It was originally called
+  `nfsaddrs', but now the boot-time IP configuration works independently of
+  NFS, so it was renamed to `ip' and the old name remained as an alias for
+  compatibility reasons.
 
   If this parameter is missing from the kernel command line, all fields are
   assumed to be empty, and the defaults mentioned below apply. In general
-  this means that the kernel tries to configure everything using both
-  RARP and BOOTP (depending on what has been enabled during kernel confi-
-  guration, and if both what protocol answer got in first).
-
-  <client-ip>	IP address of the client. If empty, the address will either
-		be determined by RARP or BOOTP. What protocol is used de-
-		pends on what has been enabled during kernel configuration
-		and on the <autoconf> parameter. If this parameter is not
-		empty, neither RARP nor BOOTP will be used.
-
-  <server-ip>	IP address of the NFS server. If RARP is used to determine
-		the client address and this parameter is NOT empty only
-		replies from the specified server are accepted. To use
-		different RARP and NFS server, specify your RARP server
-		here (or leave it blank), and specify your NFS server in
-		the `nfsroot' parameter (see above). If this entry is blank
-		the address of the server is used which answered the RARP
-		or BOOTP request.
-
-  <gw-ip>	IP address of a gateway if the server is on a different
-		subnet. If this entry is empty no gateway is used and the
-		server is assumed to be on the local network, unless a
-		value has been received by BOOTP.
-
-  <netmask>	Netmask for local network interface. If this is empty,
-		the netmask is derived from the client IP address assuming
-		classful addressing, unless overridden in BOOTP reply.
-
-  <hostname>	Name of the client. If empty, the client IP address is
-		used in ASCII notation, or the value received by BOOTP.
-
-  <device>	Name of network device to use. If this is empty, all
-		devices are used for RARP and BOOTP requests, and the
-		first one we receive a reply on is configured. If you have
-		only one device, you can safely leave this blank.
-
-  <autoconf>	Method to use for autoconfiguration. If this is either
-		'rarp' or 'bootp', the specified protocol is used.
-		If the value is 'both' or empty, both protocols are used
-		so far as they have been enabled during kernel configura-
-		tion. 'off' means no autoconfiguration.
+  this means that the kernel tries to configure everything using
+  autoconfiguration.
 
   The <autoconf> parameter can appear alone as the value to the `ip'
   parameter (without all the ':' characters before) in which case auto-
   configuration is used.
 
+  <client-ip>	IP address of the client.
+
+  		Default:  Determined using autoconfiguration.
+
+  <server-ip>	IP address of the NFS server. If RARP is used to determine
+		the client address and this parameter is NOT empty only
+		replies from the specified server are accepted.
+
+		Only required for for NFS root. That is autoconfiguration
+		will not be triggered if it is missing and NFS root is not
+		in operation.
+
+		Default: Determined using autoconfiguration.
+		         The address of the autoconfiguration server is used.
+
+  <gw-ip>	IP address of a gateway if the server is on a different subnet.
+
+		Default: Determined using autoconfiguration.
+
+  <netmask>	Netmask for local network interface. If unspecified
+		the netmask is derived from the client IP address assuming
+		classful addressing.
+
+		Default:  Determined using autoconfiguration.
+
+  <hostname>	Name of the client. May be supplied by autoconfiguration,
+  		but its absence will not trigger autoconfiguration.
+
+  		Default: Client IP address is used in ASCII notation.
+
+  <device>	Name of network device to use.
+
+		Default: If the host only has one device, it is used.
+			 Otherwise the device is determined using
+			 autoconfiguration. This is done by sending
+			 autoconfiguration requests out of all devices,
+			 and using the device that received the first reply.
+
+  <autoconf>	Method to use for autoconfiguration. In the case of options
+                which specify multiple autoconfiguration protocols,
+		requests are sent using all protocols, and the first one
+		to reply is used.
+
+		Only autoconfiguration protocols that have been compiled
+		into the kernel will be used, regardless of the value of
+		this option.
+
+                  off or none: don't use autoconfiguration (default)
+		  on or any:   use any protocol available in the kernel
+		  dhcp:        use DHCP
+		  bootp:       use BOOTP
+		  rarp:        use RARP
+		  both:        use both BOOTP and RARP but not DHCP
+		               (old option kept for backwards compatibility)
+
+                Default: any
 
 
 
-3.) Kernel loader
-    -------------
 
-To get the kernel into memory different approaches can be used. They
-depend on what facilities are available:
+3.) Boot Loader
+    ----------
+
+To get the kernel into memory different approaches can be used.
+They depend on various facilities being available:
 
 
-3.1)  Writing the kernel onto a floppy using dd:
-	As always you can just write the kernel onto a floppy using dd,
-	but then it's not possible to use kernel command lines at all.
-	To substitute the 'root=' parameter, create a dummy device on any
-	linux system with major number 0 and minor number 255 using mknod:
+3.1)  Booting from a floppy using syslinux
 
-		mknod /dev/boot255 c 0 255
+	When building kernels, an easy way to create a boot floppy that uses
+	syslinux is to use the zdisk or bzdisk make targets which use
+      	and bzimage images respectively. Both targets accept the
+     	FDARGS parameter which can be used to set the kernel command line.
 
-	Then copy the kernel zImage file onto a floppy using dd:
+	e.g.
+	   make bzdisk FDARGS="root=/dev/nfs"
 
-		dd if=/usr/src/linux/arch/i386/boot/zImage of=/dev/fd0
+   	Note that the user running this command will need to have
+     	access to the floppy drive device, /dev/fd0
 
-	And finally use rdev to set the root device:
+     	For more information on syslinux, including how to create bootdisks
+     	for prebuilt kernels, see http://syslinux.zytor.com/
 
-		rdev /dev/fd0 /dev/boot255
+	N.B: Previously it was possible to write a kernel directly to
+	     a floppy using dd, configure the boot device using rdev, and
+	     boot using the resulting floppy. Linux no longer supports this
+	     method of booting.
 
-	You can then remove the dummy device /dev/boot255 again. There
-	is no real device available for it.
-	The other two kernel command line parameters cannot be substi-
-	tuted with rdev. Therefore, using this method the kernel will
-	by default use RARP and/or BOOTP, and if it gets an answer via
-	RARP will mount the directory /tftpboot/<client-ip>/ as its
-	root. If it got a BOOTP answer the directory name in that answer
-	is used.
+3.2) Booting from a cdrom using isolinux
+
+     	When building kernels, an easy way to create a bootable cdrom that
+     	uses isolinux is to use the isoimage target which uses a bzimage
+     	image. Like zdisk and bzdisk, this target accepts the FDARGS
+     	parameter which can be used to set the kernel command line.
+
+	e.g.
+	  make isoimage FDARGS="root=/dev/nfs"
+
+     	The resulting iso image will be arch/<ARCH>/boot/image.iso
+     	This can be written to a cdrom using a variety of tools including
+     	cdrecord.
+
+	e.g.
+	  cdrecord dev=ATAPI:1,0,0 arch/i386/boot/image.iso
+
+     	For more information on isolinux, including how to create bootdisks
+     	for prebuilt kernels, see http://syslinux.zytor.com/
 
 3.2) Using LILO
-	When using LILO you can specify all necessary command line
-	parameters with the 'append=' command in the LILO configuration
-	file. However, to use the 'root=' command you also need to
-	set up a dummy device as described in 3.1 above. For how to use
-	LILO and its 'append=' command please refer to the LILO
-	documentation.
+	When using LILO all the necessary command line parameters may be
+	specified using the 'append=' directive in the LILO configuration
+	file.
+
+	However, to use the 'root=' directive you also need to create
+	a dummy root device, which may be removed after LILO is run.
+
+	mknod /dev/boot255 c 0 255
+
+	For information on configuring LILO, please refer to its documentation.
 
 3.3) Using GRUB
-	When you use GRUB, you simply append the parameters after the kernel
-	specification: "kernel <kernel> <parameters>" (without the quotes).
+	When using GRUB, kernel parameter are simply appended after the kernel
+	specification: kernel <kernel> <parameters>
 
 3.4) Using loadlin
-	When you want to boot Linux from a DOS command prompt without
-	having a local hard disk to mount as root, you can use loadlin.
-	I was told that it works, but haven't used it myself yet. In
-	general you should be able to create a kernel command line simi-
-	lar to how LILO is doing it. Please refer to the loadlin docu-
-	mentation for further information.
+	loadlin may be used to boot Linux from a DOS command prompt without
+	requiring a local hard disk to mount as root. This has not been
+	thoroughly tested by the authors of this document, but in general
+	it should be possible configure the kernel command line similarly
+	to the configuration of LILO.
+
+	Please refer to the loadlin documentation for further information.
 
 3.5) Using a boot ROM
-	This is probably the most elegant way of booting a diskless
-	client. With a boot ROM the kernel gets loaded using the TFTP
-	protocol. As far as I know, no commercial boot ROMs yet
-	support booting Linux over the network, but there are two
-	free implementations of a boot ROM available on sunsite.unc.edu
-	and its mirrors. They are called 'netboot-nfs' and 'etherboot'.
-	Both contain everything you need to boot a diskless Linux client.
+	This is probably the most elegant way of booting a diskless client.
+	With a boot ROM the kernel is loaded using the TFTP protocol. The
+	authors of this document are not aware of any no commercial boot
+	ROMs that support booting Linux over the network. However, there
+	are two free implementations of a boot ROM, netboot-nfs and
+	etherboot, both of which are available on sunsite.unc.edu, and both
+	of which contain everything you need to boot a diskless Linux client.
 
 3.6) Using pxelinux
-	Using pxelinux you specify the kernel you built with
+	Pxelinux may be used to boot linux using the PXE boot loader
+	which is present on many modern network cards.
+
+	When using pxelinux, the kernel image is specified using
 	"kernel <relative-path-below /tftpboot>". The nfsroot parameters
 	are passed to the kernel by adding them to the "append" line.
-	You may perhaps also want to fine tune the console output,
-	see Documentation/serial-console.txt for serial console help.
+	It is common to use serial console in conjunction with pxeliunx,
+	see Documentation/serial-console.txt for more information.
+
+	For more information on isolinux, including how to create bootdisks
+	for prebuilt kernels, see http://syslinux.zytor.com/
 
 
 

Documentation/pci.txt

@@ -213,11 +213,19 @@ have been remapped by the kernel.
 
    See Documentation/IO-mapping.txt for how to access device memory.
 
-   You still need to call request_region() for I/O regions and
-request_mem_region() for memory regions to make sure nobody else is using the
-same device.
+   The device driver needs to call pci_request_region() to make sure
+no other device is already using the same resource. The driver is expected
+to determine MMIO and IO Port resource availability _before_ calling
+pci_enable_device().  Conversely, drivers should call pci_release_region()
+_after_ calling pci_disable_device(). The idea is to prevent two devices
+colliding on the same address range.
 
-   All interrupt handlers should be registered with SA_SHIRQ and use the devid
+Generic flavors of pci_request_region() are request_mem_region()
+(for MMIO ranges) and request_region() (for IO Port ranges).
+Use these for address resources that are not described by "normal" PCI
+interfaces (e.g. BAR).
+
+   All interrupt handlers should be registered with IRQF_SHARED and use the devid
 to map IRQs to devices (remember that all PCI interrupts are shared).
 
 

Documentation/pcmcia/crc32hash.c

@@ -0,0 +1,32 @@
+/* crc32hash.c - derived from linux/lib/crc32.c, GNU GPL v2 */
+/* Usage example:
+$ ./crc32hash "Dual Speed"
+*/
+
+#include <string.h>
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <ctype.h>
+#include <stdlib.h>
+
+unsigned int crc32(unsigned char const *p, unsigned int len)
+{
+	int i;
+	unsigned int crc = 0;
+	while (len--) {
+		crc ^= *p++;
+		for (i = 0; i < 8; i++)
+			crc = (crc >> 1) ^ ((crc & 1) ? 0xedb88320 : 0);
+	}
+	return crc;
+}
+
+int main(int argc, char **argv) {
+	unsigned int result;
+	if (argc != 2) {
+		printf("no string passed as argument\n");
+		return -1;
+	}
+	result = crc32(argv[1], strlen(argv[1]));
+	printf("0x%x\n", result);
+	return 0;
+}

Documentation/pcmcia/devicetable.txt

@@ -27,37 +27,7 @@ pcmcia:m0149cC1ABf06pfn00fn00pa725B842DpbF1EFEE84pc0877B627pd00000000
 The hex value after "pa" is the hash of product ID string 1, after "pb" for
 string 2 and so on.
 
-Alternatively, you can use this small tool to determine the crc32 hash.
-simply pass the string you want to evaluate as argument to this program,
-e.g.
+Alternatively, you can use crc32hash (see Documentation/pcmcia/crc32hash.c)
+to determine the crc32 hash.  Simply pass the string you want to evaluate
+as argument to this program, e.g.:
 $ ./crc32hash "Dual Speed"
-
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
-/* crc32hash.c - derived from linux/lib/crc32.c, GNU GPL v2 */
-#include <string.h>
-#include <stdio.h>
-#include <ctype.h>
-#include <stdlib.h>
-
-unsigned int crc32(unsigned char const *p, unsigned int len)
-{
-	int i;
-	unsigned int crc = 0;
-	while (len--) {
-		crc ^= *p++;
-		for (i = 0; i < 8; i++)
-			crc = (crc >> 1) ^ ((crc & 1) ? 0xedb88320 : 0);
-	}
-	return crc;
-}
-
-int main(int argc, char **argv) {
-	unsigned int result;
-	if (argc != 2) {
-		printf("no string passed as argument\n");
-		return -1;
-	}
-	result = crc32(argv[1], strlen(argv[1]));
-	printf("0x%x\n", result);
-	return 0;
-}

Documentation/pi-futex.txt

@@ -0,0 +1,121 @@
+Lightweight PI-futexes
+----------------------
+
+We are calling them lightweight for 3 reasons:
+
+ - in the user-space fastpath a PI-enabled futex involves no kernel work
+   (or any other PI complexity) at all. No registration, no extra kernel
+   calls - just pure fast atomic ops in userspace.
+
+ - even in the slowpath, the system call and scheduling pattern is very
+   similar to normal futexes.
+
+ - the in-kernel PI implementation is streamlined around the mutex
+   abstraction, with strict rules that keep the implementation
+   relatively simple: only a single owner may own a lock (i.e. no
+   read-write lock support), only the owner may unlock a lock, no
+   recursive locking, etc.
+
+Priority Inheritance - why?
+---------------------------
+
+The short reply: user-space PI helps achieving/improving determinism for
+user-space applications. In the best-case, it can help achieve
+determinism and well-bound latencies. Even in the worst-case, PI will
+improve the statistical distribution of locking related application
+delays.
+
+The longer reply:
+-----------------
+
+Firstly, sharing locks between multiple tasks is a common programming
+technique that often cannot be replaced with lockless algorithms. As we
+can see it in the kernel [which is a quite complex program in itself],
+lockless structures are rather the exception than the norm - the current
+ratio of lockless vs. locky code for shared data structures is somewhere
+between 1:10 and 1:100. Lockless is hard, and the complexity of lockless
+algorithms often endangers to ability to do robust reviews of said code.
+I.e. critical RT apps often choose lock structures to protect critical
+data structures, instead of lockless algorithms. Furthermore, there are
+cases (like shared hardware, or other resource limits) where lockless
+access is mathematically impossible.
+
+Media players (such as Jack) are an example of reasonable application
+design with multiple tasks (with multiple priority levels) sharing
+short-held locks: for example, a highprio audio playback thread is
+combined with medium-prio construct-audio-data threads and low-prio
+display-colory-stuff threads. Add video and decoding to the mix and
+we've got even more priority levels.
+
+So once we accept that synchronization objects (locks) are an
+unavoidable fact of life, and once we accept that multi-task userspace
+apps have a very fair expectation of being able to use locks, we've got
+to think about how to offer the option of a deterministic locking
+implementation to user-space.
+
+Most of the technical counter-arguments against doing priority
+inheritance only apply to kernel-space locks. But user-space locks are
+different, there we cannot disable interrupts or make the task
+non-preemptible in a critical section, so the 'use spinlocks' argument
+does not apply (user-space spinlocks have the same priority inversion
+problems as other user-space locking constructs). Fact is, pretty much
+the only technique that currently enables good determinism for userspace
+locks (such as futex-based pthread mutexes) is priority inheritance:
+
+Currently (without PI), if a high-prio and a low-prio task shares a lock
+[this is a quite common scenario for most non-trivial RT applications],
+even if all critical sections are coded carefully to be deterministic
+(i.e. all critical sections are short in duration and only execute a
+limited number of instructions), the kernel cannot guarantee any
+deterministic execution of the high-prio task: any medium-priority task
+could preempt the low-prio task while it holds the shared lock and
+executes the critical section, and could delay it indefinitely.
+
+Implementation:
+---------------
+
+As mentioned before, the userspace fastpath of PI-enabled pthread
+mutexes involves no kernel work at all - they behave quite similarly to
+normal futex-based locks: a 0 value means unlocked, and a value==TID
+means locked. (This is the same method as used by list-based robust
+futexes.) Userspace uses atomic ops to lock/unlock these mutexes without
+entering the kernel.
+
+To handle the slowpath, we have added two new futex ops:
+
+  FUTEX_LOCK_PI
+  FUTEX_UNLOCK_PI
+
+If the lock-acquire fastpath fails, [i.e. an atomic transition from 0 to
+TID fails], then FUTEX_LOCK_PI is called. The kernel does all the
+remaining work: if there is no futex-queue attached to the futex address
+yet then the code looks up the task that owns the futex [it has put its
+own TID into the futex value], and attaches a 'PI state' structure to
+the futex-queue. The pi_state includes an rt-mutex, which is a PI-aware,
+kernel-based synchronization object. The 'other' task is made the owner
+of the rt-mutex, and the FUTEX_WAITERS bit is atomically set in the
+futex value. Then this task tries to lock the rt-mutex, on which it
+blocks. Once it returns, it has the mutex acquired, and it sets the
+futex value to its own TID and returns. Userspace has no other work to
+perform - it now owns the lock, and futex value contains
+FUTEX_WAITERS|TID.
+
+If the unlock side fastpath succeeds, [i.e. userspace manages to do a
+TID -> 0 atomic transition of the futex value], then no kernel work is
+triggered.
+
+If the unlock fastpath fails (because the FUTEX_WAITERS bit is set),
+then FUTEX_UNLOCK_PI is called, and the kernel unlocks the futex on the
+behalf of userspace - and it also unlocks the attached
+pi_state->rt_mutex and thus wakes up any potential waiters.
+
+Note that under this approach, contrary to previous PI-futex approaches,
+there is no prior 'registration' of a PI-futex. [which is not quite
+possible anyway, due to existing ABI properties of pthread mutexes.]
+
+Also, under this scheme, 'robustness' and 'PI' are two orthogonal
+properties of futexes, and all four combinations are possible: futex,
+robust-futex, PI-futex, robust+PI-futex.
+
+More details about priority inheritance can be found in
+Documentation/rtmutex.txt.

Documentation/power/devices.txt

@@ -118,96 +118,6 @@ will fail.
 There is currently no way to know what states a device or driver
 supports a priori. This will change in the future. 
 
-pm_message_t meaning
-
-pm_message_t has two fields. event ("major"), and flags.  If driver
-does not know event code, it aborts the request, returning error. Some
-drivers may need to deal with special cases based on the actual type
-of suspend operation being done at the system level. This is why
-there are flags.
-
-Event codes are:
-
-ON -- no need to do anything except special cases like broken
-HW.
-
-# NOTIFICATION -- pretty much same as ON?
-
-FREEZE -- stop DMA and interrupts, and be prepared to reinit HW from
-scratch. That probably means stop accepting upstream requests, the
-actual policy of what to do with them beeing specific to a given
-driver. It's acceptable for a network driver to just drop packets
-while a block driver is expected to block the queue so no request is
-lost. (Use IDE as an example on how to do that). FREEZE requires no
-power state change, and it's expected for drivers to be able to
-quickly transition back to operating state.
-
-SUSPEND -- like FREEZE, but also put hardware into low-power state. If
-there's need to distinguish several levels of sleep, additional flag
-is probably best way to do that.
-
-Transitions are only from a resumed state to a suspended state, never
-between 2 suspended states. (ON -> FREEZE or ON -> SUSPEND can happen,
-FREEZE -> SUSPEND or SUSPEND -> FREEZE can not).
-
-All events are:
-
-[NOTE NOTE NOTE: If you are driver author, you should not care; you
-should only look at event, and ignore flags.]
-
-#Prepare for suspend -- userland is still running but we are going to
-#enter suspend state. This gives drivers chance to load firmware from
-#disk and store it in memory, or do other activities taht require
-#operating userland, ability to kmalloc GFP_KERNEL, etc... All of these
-#are forbiden once the suspend dance is started.. event = ON, flags =
-#PREPARE_TO_SUSPEND
-
-Apm standby -- prepare for APM event. Quiesce devices to make life
-easier for APM BIOS. event = FREEZE, flags = APM_STANDBY
-
-Apm suspend -- same as APM_STANDBY, but it we should probably avoid
-spinning down disks. event = FREEZE, flags = APM_SUSPEND
-
-System halt, reboot -- quiesce devices to make life easier for BIOS. event
-= FREEZE, flags = SYSTEM_HALT or SYSTEM_REBOOT
-
-System shutdown -- at least disks need to be spun down, or data may be
-lost. Quiesce devices, just to make life easier for BIOS. event =
-FREEZE, flags = SYSTEM_SHUTDOWN
-
-Kexec    -- turn off DMAs and put hardware into some state where new
-kernel can take over. event = FREEZE, flags = KEXEC
-
-Powerdown at end of swsusp -- very similar to SYSTEM_SHUTDOWN, except wake
-may need to be enabled on some devices. This actually has at least 3
-subtypes, system can reboot, enter S4 and enter S5 at the end of
-swsusp. event = FREEZE, flags = SWSUSP and one of SYSTEM_REBOOT,
-SYSTEM_SHUTDOWN, SYSTEM_S4
-
-Suspend to ram  -- put devices into low power state. event = SUSPEND,
-flags = SUSPEND_TO_RAM
-
-Freeze for swsusp snapshot -- stop DMA and interrupts. No need to put
-devices into low power mode, but you must be able to reinitialize
-device from scratch in resume method. This has two flavors, its done
-once on suspending kernel, once on resuming kernel. event = FREEZE,
-flags = DURING_SUSPEND or DURING_RESUME
-
-Device detach requested from /sys -- deinitialize device; proably same as
-SYSTEM_SHUTDOWN, I do not understand this one too much. probably event
-= FREEZE, flags = DEV_DETACH.
-
-#These are not really events sent:
-#
-#System fully on -- device is working normally; this is probably never
-#passed to suspend() method... event = ON, flags = 0
-#
-#Ready after resume -- userland is now running, again. Time to free any
-#memory you ate during prepare to suspend... event = ON, flags =
-#READY_AFTER_RESUME
-#
-
-
 pm_message_t meaning
 
 pm_message_t has two fields. event ("major"), and flags.  If driver

Documentation/power/swsusp.txt

@@ -18,10 +18,11 @@ Some warnings, first.
  *
  * (*) suspend/resume support is needed to make it safe.
  *
- * If you have any filesystems on USB devices mounted before suspend,
+ * If you have any filesystems on USB devices mounted before software suspend,
  * they won't be accessible after resume and you may lose data, as though
- * you have unplugged the USB devices with mounted filesystems on them
- * (see the FAQ below for details).
+ * you have unplugged the USB devices with mounted filesystems on them;
+ * see the FAQ below for details.  (This is not true for more traditional
+ * power states like "standby", which normally don't turn USB off.)
 
 You need to append resume=/dev/your_swap_partition to kernel command
 line. Then you suspend by
@@ -204,7 +205,7 @@ Q: There don't seem to be any generally useful behavioral
 distinctions between SUSPEND and FREEZE.
 
 A: Doing SUSPEND when you are asked to do FREEZE is always correct,
-but it may be unneccessarily slow. If you want USB to stay simple,
+but it may be unneccessarily slow. If you want your driver to stay simple,
 slowness may not matter to you. It can always be fixed later.
 
 For devices like disk it does matter, you do not want to spindown for
@@ -349,25 +350,72 @@ Q: How do I make suspend more verbose?
 
 A: If you want to see any non-error kernel messages on the virtual
 terminal the kernel switches to during suspend, you have to set the
-kernel console loglevel to at least 5, for example by doing
+kernel console loglevel to at least 4 (KERN_WARNING), for example by
+doing
 
-	echo 5 > /proc/sys/kernel/printk
+	# save the old loglevel
+	read LOGLEVEL DUMMY < /proc/sys/kernel/printk
+	# set the loglevel so we see the progress bar.
+	# if the level is higher than needed, we leave it alone.
+	if [ $LOGLEVEL -lt 5 ]; then
+	        echo 5 > /proc/sys/kernel/printk
+		fi
+
+        IMG_SZ=0
+        read IMG_SZ < /sys/power/image_size
+        echo -n disk > /sys/power/state
+        RET=$?
+        #
+        # the logic here is:
+        # if image_size > 0 (without kernel support, IMG_SZ will be zero),
+        # then try again with image_size set to zero.
+	if [ $RET -ne 0 -a $IMG_SZ -ne 0 ]; then # try again with minimal image size
+                echo 0 > /sys/power/image_size
+                echo -n disk > /sys/power/state
+                RET=$?
+        fi
+
+	# restore previous loglevel
+	echo $LOGLEVEL > /proc/sys/kernel/printk
+	exit $RET
 
 Q: Is this true that if I have a mounted filesystem on a USB device and
 I suspend to disk, I can lose data unless the filesystem has been mounted
 with "sync"?
 
-A: That's right.  It depends on your hardware, and it could be true even for
-suspend-to-RAM.  In fact, even with "-o sync" you can lose data if your
-programs have information in buffers they haven't written out to disk.
+A: That's right ... if you disconnect that device, you may lose data.
+In fact, even with "-o sync" you can lose data if your programs have
+information in buffers they haven't written out to a disk you disconnect,
+or if you disconnect before the device finished saving data you wrote.
 
-If you're lucky, your hardware will support low-power modes for USB
-controllers while the system is asleep.  Lots of hardware doesn't,
-however.  Shutting off the power to a USB controller is equivalent to
-unplugging all the attached devices.
+Software suspend normally powers down USB controllers, which is equivalent
+to disconnecting all USB devices attached to your system.
+
+Your system might well support low-power modes for its USB controllers
+while the system is asleep, maintaining the connection, using true sleep
+modes like "suspend-to-RAM" or "standby".  (Don't write "disk" to the
+/sys/power/state file; write "standby" or "mem".)  We've not seen any
+hardware that can use these modes through software suspend, although in
+theory some systems might support "platform" or "firmware" modes that
+won't break the USB connections.
 
 Remember that it's always a bad idea to unplug a disk drive containing a
-mounted filesystem.  With USB that's true even when your system is asleep!
-The safest thing is to unmount all USB-based filesystems before suspending
-and remount them after resuming.
+mounted filesystem.  That's true even when your system is asleep!  The
+safest thing is to unmount all filesystems on removable media (such USB,
+Firewire, CompactFlash, MMC, external SATA, or even IDE hotplug bays)
+before suspending; then remount them after resuming.
 
+Q: I upgraded the kernel from 2.6.15 to 2.6.16. Both kernels were
+compiled with the similar configuration files. Anyway I found that
+suspend to disk (and resume) is much slower on 2.6.16 compared to
+2.6.15. Any idea for why that might happen or how can I speed it up?
+
+A: This is because the size of the suspend image is now greater than
+for 2.6.15 (by saving more data we can get more responsive system
+after resume).
+
+There's the /sys/power/image_size knob that controls the size of the
+image.  If you set it to 0 (eg. by echo 0 > /sys/power/image_size as
+root), the 2.6.15 behavior should be restored.  If it is still too
+slow, take a look at suspend.sf.net -- userland suspend is faster and
+supports LZF compression to speed it up further.

Documentation/power/video.txt

@@ -90,6 +90,7 @@ Table of known working notebooks:
 Model                           hack (or "how to do it")
 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 Acer Aspire 1406LC		ole's late BIOS init (7), turn off DRI
+Acer TM 230			s3_bios (2)
 Acer TM 242FX			vbetool (6)
 Acer TM C110			video_post (8)
 Acer TM C300                    vga=normal (only suspend on console, not in X), vbetool (6) or video_post (8)
@@ -115,6 +116,7 @@ Dell D610			vga=normal and X (possibly vbestate (6) too, but not tested)
 Dell Inspiron 4000		??? (*)
 Dell Inspiron 500m		??? (*)
 Dell Inspiron 510m		???
+Dell Inspiron 5150		vbetool needed (6)
 Dell Inspiron 600m		??? (*)
 Dell Inspiron 8200		??? (*)
 Dell Inspiron 8500		??? (*)
@@ -125,6 +127,7 @@ HP NX7000			??? (*)
 HP Pavilion ZD7000		vbetool post needed, need open-source nv driver for X
 HP Omnibook XE3	athlon version	none (1)
 HP Omnibook XE3GC		none (1), video is S3 Savage/IX-MV
+HP Omnibook XE3L-GF		vbetool (6)
 HP Omnibook 5150		none (1), (S1 also works OK)
 IBM TP T20, model 2647-44G	none (1), video is S3 Inc. 86C270-294 Savage/IX-MV, vesafb gets "interesting" but X work.
 IBM TP A31 / Type 2652-M5G      s3_mode (3) [works ok with BIOS 1.04 2002-08-23, but not at all with BIOS 1.11 2004-11-05 :-(]
@@ -157,6 +160,7 @@ Sony Vaio vgn-s260		X or boot-radeon can init it (5)
 Sony Vaio vgn-S580BH		vga=normal, but suspend from X. Console will be blank unless you return to X.
 Sony Vaio vgn-FS115B		s3_bios (2),s3_mode (4)
 Toshiba Libretto L5		none (1)
+Toshiba Libretto 100CT/110CT    vbetool (6)
 Toshiba Portege 3020CT		s3_mode (3)
 Toshiba Satellite 4030CDT	s3_mode (3) (S1 also works OK)
 Toshiba Satellite 4080XCDT      s3_mode (3) (S1 also works OK)

Documentation/powerpc/booting-without-of.txt

@@ -1436,9 +1436,9 @@ platforms are moved over to use the flattened-device-tree model.
                interrupts = <1d 3>;
                interrupt-parent = <40000>;
                num-channels = <4>;
-               channel-fifo-len = <24>;
+               channel-fifo-len = <18>;
                exec-units-mask = <000000fe>;
-               descriptor-types-mask = <073f1127>;
+               descriptor-types-mask = <012b0ebf>;
        };